JP7096496B2 - Pachinko game machine - Google Patents

Description

Regarding pachinko gaming machines.

In recent pachinko gaming machines, a big hit lottery with a predetermined probability is made when a game ball enters the starting port on the game board surface (game area), and if the big hit lottery is won, a big hit (special game). ) The mainstream is a pachinko machine that shifts to the state and opens the large prize opening provided on the game board to win a large number of prize balls. Among the pachinko gaming machines configured in this way, a time-shortening gaming state that increases the efficiency of probability fluctuation gaming states that increase the winning probability in the jackpot lottery and symbol fluctuations for notifying the lottery results in the jackpot lottery. There are also gaming machines that enhance the interest of the game by creating a gaming progress state that is advantageous to the player according to these gaming states.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2001-347000

However, since many such gaming machines have existed in the past, there is a problem that it is desired to develop a model that realizes further novel playability.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect is
Starting ports (for example, first main game starting ports A10 and A10-2) through which game balls can enter, and
An identification information display unit that can display identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) and
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of a game,
A staging display unit that can display staging (for example, staging display device SG),
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game club
Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers based on the entry into the starting port,
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means that temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied, and a random number temporary storage means.
When the pass / fail judgment permission condition for a certain hold is satisfied, the pass / fail judgment is executed based on the random number related to the hold, and the stop display mode of the identification information and the variable display mode of the identification information are determined based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. Means for determining game content and
An identification information display control means that controls the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit according to the determination by the game content determination means.
A special game control means capable of executing a special game that is advantageous for the player after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the random number is a win and the identification information is stopped and displayed.
It is equipped with a game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying the effect executed on the sub-game department side to the sub-game department side.
The sub-game club
A game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means, the effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit, and the effect display content control means.
It is provided with a staging symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the staging symbol to be displayed on the staging display unit after the staging symbol is variablely displayed on the staging display unit.
When there is one or more pre-digestion holds that satisfy a certain hold and the variable display start condition of the identification information prior to the certain hold, the variable display start condition of the identification information related to the pre-digestion hold During the variable display of the identification information when the above is satisfied, it is possible to execute a plurality of look-ahead effects foretelling the expected degree of execution of the future special game due to the certain hold.
As a plurality of look-ahead effects, there are a first look-ahead effect that can be displayed for each change in the identification information related to the pre-digestion hold, and an effect using a specific image different from the effect symbol. The second look-ahead effect, which can be continuously displayed until the change of the identification information related to the certain hold when displayed in the change of the identification information related to the pre-digestion hold, and the effect using the effect symbol, are for the effect. By displaying a special symbol as a symbol, it has a third look-ahead effect that can change the effect display content controlled by the effect display content control means to an effect display content different from that before the special symbol is displayed.
When it is decided to execute both the first look-ahead effect and the second look-ahead effect, the first look-ahead effect can be executed for each change of the identification information regarding the identification information regarding the look-ahead hold.
While the second look-ahead effect and the third look-ahead effect can be executed at the same time, the first look-ahead effect and the third look-ahead effect are not executed at the same time.
The staging symbols are divided into a plurality of systems, and one system is configured to include one or more staging symbols.
When the final display mode of the staging symbol is displayed, the final display mode of the staging symbol is displayed in each of the plurality of staging symbol rows, so that the final staging symbol composed of the plurality of staging symbols is displayed. It is configured to display a combination of display modes.
When the first look-ahead effect is executed, at least one final display mode of the effect symbol among the final display modes of the effect symbols displayed in each of the plurality of effect symbol rows is the other effect symbol. It is configured so that the design is different from the final display mode of.
It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that when the stop display of the effect symbol related to the first look-ahead effect is performed, the effect effect according to the type of the effect symbol related to the first look-ahead effect is executed.

According to the pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect, further novel game performance can be realized in a gaming machine that adopts the concept of creating a gaming progress state that is advantageous for the player.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of a prize ball payout unit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is an operation diagram of the prize ball payout unit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a flowchart of the main processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a flowchart of a setting change process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of NMI interrupt processing (at the time of power interruption) on the main control board side in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart of a prize ball payout command transmission control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flowchart of a payout control board transmission control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is an image diagram relating to the prize ball payout command and payout-related information on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flowchart of the payout control board reception control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of a ball entry detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game start port entry ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the main game start port entry ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the main game start port entry ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the first (second) large winning opening ball entry detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of a general winning opening ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the ejection ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the out-port / in-ball detection process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the prize ball number determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the electric accessory drive determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the distribution ball opening in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the distribution member drive control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the first non-electric accessory drive control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the second non-electric accessory drive control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 30 is a flowchart of a main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 31 is a configuration diagram of a main game table used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 32 is a configuration diagram of a main game table used in the first main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 33 is a configuration diagram of a main game table used in the first main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 34 is a configuration diagram of a main game table used in the first main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 35 is a configuration diagram of a main game table used in the second main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the other main game fluctuation control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of a small hit game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 39 is a flowchart of a special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 41 is a flowchart of a special game operation condition determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 42 is a flowchart of fraud detection information management processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 43 is a flowchart of error management processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the firing control signal output processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of an external signal output process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the payout control board side main process on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 47 is a flowchart of an error control process at the time of abnormality detection on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 48 is a flowchart of an error control process when a payout motor operation abnormality is detected on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of an error control process when a payout abnormality is detected on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of an error control process when a ball path abnormality is detected on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of an error control process when a payout motor abnormality is detected on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of an error control process when a payout stop abnormality is detected on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 53 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout-related information transmission / reception process (to the main control board) on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout control process (at the time of starting the prize ball payout / starting the motor drive) on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout control process (at the end of motor drive / at the end of prize ball payout) on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout control process (at the time of motor drive execution) on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart of a motor error processing on the payout control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 58 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 59 is a flowchart of the customized control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 60 is a flowchart of the customized guidance screen display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 61 is a customized guide screen image FIG. 1 in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 62 is a flowchart of the display control process during customization execution on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 63 is a customized guide screen image FIG. 2 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 64 is a customized screen image diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing the occurrence probability for each occurrence frequency in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 66 is an image diagram of customization during fluctuation in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 67 is a flowchart of the customized control process during the game on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 68 is a flowchart of the hold information management process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 69 is a flowchart of the first main game look-ahead determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 70 is a configuration diagram of a look-ahead lottery table in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 71 is a flowchart of the look-ahead hold content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 72 is an example of a pending change scenario determination table in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 74 is a flowchart of the effect content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 75 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 76 is a flowchart of the hold change effect execution process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 77 is an image diagram of a hold change effect execution on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 78 is a flowchart of a special game-related display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 79 is a gaming state transition diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 80 is a timing chart of a gaming state transition and a small hit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 81 is an image diagram of a standby mode and rush mode display screen in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 82 is an image diagram of a button effect during a big hit game in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing the flow rate of game balls in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 84 is a stage and stage level transition diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 85 is a timing chart of the stage level up within one variation in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 86 is an image diagram of the stage level up before the tempai in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a method of drawing a notice of a change in the stage level of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 88 is an image diagram of the stage level up by the look-ahead effect in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 89 is a configuration diagram of a pattern lottery table for raising the stage level by pre-reading effect in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 90 is a timing chart of the annihilation effect in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 91 is an image diagram showing the flow of the annihilation effect when the character A is selected in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 92 is an image diagram showing the flow of the annihilation effect when the character B is selected in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 93 is a configuration diagram of a chance eye scenario determination table in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 94 is an image diagram showing the flow of chance eyes in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 95 is an image diagram showing a flow of effect of a pattern in which a chance eye ends in the middle of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 96 is an image diagram showing a flow of production of a pattern in which the display of the first chance is completed and the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment is revived. FIG. 97 is an example of changing the configuration diagram of the look-ahead lottery table in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 98 is an image diagram of an example of changing the chance eye in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment.

Form to carry out

First, the meaning of each term in the present specification will be described. "Prize ball" includes not only a prize in which a prize ball is paid out, but also a passage to a "through chucker" in which no prize ball is paid out. The "identification information" may be in any form as long as the type of information can be identified through the five senses (visual, auditory, tactile, etc.), but preferably visual information such as numbers, letters, and patterns. Those having a shape such as, etc. can be mentioned. Further, in the present specification, the "identification information" may be referred to as a main game symbol / special symbol (special symbol) or a decorative symbol (designation), but the "special symbol (special symbol)" is a main control board. It is the identification information whose display is controlled on the side, and the "decorative pattern (designation)" is the identification information as an effect displayed on the sub-control board side. "Displayable identification information" is not limited to the display method, and includes, for example, light emission of light emitting means (for example, liquid crystal display, LED, 7-segment display) (including not only the presence or absence of light emission but also the difference in color) and physics. Display (for example, the symbol drawn on the reel band is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position) and the like. The "open state, open state" and "closed state, closed state" are, for example, in the configuration of a general large winning opening (so-called attacker), the open state = easy winning state, and the closed state = non-winning state. It will be in an easy state. Further, for example, a state of protruding from the game board (player side) (hereinafter, may be referred to as an advanced state) and a state of being retracted into the game board (the side opposite to the player side) (hereinafter referred to as an evacuation state). In a configuration that can take (there is) (so-called tongue-type attacker), the advance state = the winning easy state, and the evacuation state = the winning non-easy state. A "random number" is a random number used in a lottery (a lottery by a computer) for determining some kind of game content in a pachinko game machine, and includes a pseudo-random number in addition to a random number in a narrow sense (for example, a hard random number). Random numbers, soft random numbers as pseudo-random numbers). For example, the so-called "basic random number" that affects the result of the game, specifically, the "winning random number (random number for winning or losing lottery)" related to the transition of the special game, and the variation mode (or variation time) of the identification symbol are determined. "Random number for determining variable mode", "Random number for determining stop symbol", "Random number for determining winning symbol" for determining whether to shift to a specific game (for example, probability variable game) after a special game, etc. be able to. It is not necessary to use all of these random numbers when determining the content of the variation mode and the content of the definite identification information, but at least one random number that is the same as or different from each other may be used. Further, in the present specification, the number of random numbers may be displayed in the form of the number of random numbers or a plurality of random numbers, but once the entry port (for example, the start entry port) that triggers the acquisition of random numbers. The random number obtained by entering the ball is called one (that is, in the above example, a bundle of random numbers such as winning random number + variation mode determination random number + symbol determination random number ... is referred to as one random number). .. Further, for example, a kind of random number (for example, a winning random number) may also serve as another kind of random number (for example, a symbol determination random number). The "gaming state" is, for example, a transition to a special gaming state in which the large winning opening can be opened, or a transition to a special gaming state rather than a non-probability variable gaming state in which the lottery probability is a predetermined value. Probability fluctuation game state with high probability of lottery, transition to special game Auxiliary game state with assistance for winning a prize at the start port that triggers the lottery (so-called normal symbol time saving state, for example, a variable member is attached to the start port In some cases, any one or more combinations such as a long opening period of the variable member, a high probability of winning the opening of the variable member, and a short time of notifying the result of the opening lottery of the variable member). Further, the "main variation display mode" is a variation mode relating to the main game symbol determined with reference to the main game table 3 and the like, and in this example, the variation mode determined by the process of step 1410-4. It has become. "Probability fluctuation gaming state" is also referred to as high probability, probability variation, and probability variation. The "auxiliary game state" is also referred to as a time-saving game state, a time-saving game state, or a high base. The "first decorative pattern" is a decorative pattern displayed so that the player can easily see it. The effects of the first decorative symbol are (1) it is possible to improve the interest of the effect during the change, and (2) it is possible to notify the result of the game by displaying the fixed stop. The "second decorative symbol" is a decorative symbol indicating that it is changing at all times, when it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the first decorative symbol, or when the player cannot visually recognize the first decorative symbol. The effects of the second decorative symbol are (1) it is possible to notify the result of the game by displaying a fixed stop, and (2) it is possible to notify that it is changing. "Reach" is sometimes referred to as reach state, reach display, or tempai, and means that two identical decorative symbols are aligned. Mainly, the same decorative symbols are aligned in the left symbol row and the right symbol row. It is used when The "development staging" is also called a reach staging, a super reach (SP reach), a super reach staging (SP reach staging), or the like, and is a staging that suggests the degree of expectation of the fluctuation that occurs after the reach. "Direction" refers to the display content that enhances the interest of the game, for example, moving images such as animations and live-action photographs, still images such as pictures, photographs, characters, etc., including identification information fluctuation / stop, notice, etc. The combination can be mentioned. The "stage (staging stage)" is also referred to as a mode (staging mode), a zone (staging zone), and a background staging, and is a staging mode shown by a background image. The effects of the stage (staging stage) are (1) display corresponding to the stage (first decorative design, notice, etc.), (2) suggestion of the degree of expectation per hit, and the like. "Temporary stop (temporary stop display)" means that the decorative design has started to fluctuate, and it seems that the decorative design has temporarily stopped, but in reality, the decorative design is slightly moving (referred to as shaking fluctuation). It is in a state (sometimes). The effects of the temporary stop (temporary stop display) can be (1) appear to be executing multiple fluctuations, (2) whether or not to make a definite stop (in other words, re-variate without a definite stop). It is possible to instigate (whether it is a hit without a fixed stop, whether it is changed to another decorative pattern without a fixed stop, etc.).

The following embodiment is a model (type 1 type 1 multifunction device) in which two conventional type 1 pachinko gaming machines are mixed. However, this is not limited to this, and it is also within the scope when applied to other gaming machines (for example, conventional pachinko gaming machines of type 1, type 2, type 3, general electric service, etc.). .. It should be noted that this embodiment is merely an example, and relates to the order of each step regarding various processes such as the location and function where each means exists, the timing of turning on / off the flag, the name of the means responsible for the process of each step, and the like. It is not limited to the following aspects. Further, the above-described embodiments and modifications should not be limitedly understood to be applied to specific ones, and may be any combination. For example, it should be understood that a modification of one embodiment is a modification of another embodiment, even if one modification and another modification are described independently. It should be understood that a combination of the modified example and the other modified example is also described. Further, in the present embodiment, there are a lottery table and a reference table for various tables, but these are also not limited, and the lottery table may be used as a reference table or vice versa. Further, the term "table" in this example is not limited to the format, and one or more selection candidates are selected from a plurality of selection candidates based on one or more information. It should be understood that it is an associated aspect. Further, the numerical values as specific examples shown in the following embodiments and modification {for example, winning probability at the time of lottery execution, maximum number of rounds at the time of special game, symbol variation time, number of continuations in each game state, etc.} are It is just an example, and in particular, different conditions (for example, conditions between the first main game side and the second main game side, conditions between the probability fluctuation game and the non-probability fluctuation game, time reduction game and non-time reduction game). It is understood that the magnitude relations and combinations of the numerical values shown in (conditions with time reduction games, etc.) may be changed as appropriate as long as they do not greatly deviate from the purpose of the following embodiments and modification examples. Should. For example, the magnitude relationship between the first main game side and the second main game side in terms of the winning probability at the time of lottery execution and the expected value of the maximum number of rounds at the time of special game is the first main game side = the second main game side. Even if it is exemplified so as to be, even if the magnitude relationship is appropriately changed such that the first main game side <second main game side, or the first main game side> the second main game side. Good (same for other numbers and conditions). Further, for example, when the number of continuations of the probability fluctuation game state is configured based on the purpose of continuing until the next big hit occurs, whether to set "65535" as the number of continuations (configured so as to substantially continue). Alternatively, even in the option of the realization method based on the same purpose, such as maintaining the probability fluctuation game state until the next big hit occurs without setting the number of continuations, as long as the purpose of the following embodiments and changes is not significantly deviated. Should be understood that may be changed as appropriate.

Here, before explaining each component, the features (outline) of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

First, with reference to FIG. 1, the basic structure on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine is mainly composed of a gaming machine frame and a gaming board. Hereinafter, these will be described in order.

First, the gaming machine frame of the pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame D12, a front frame D14, a transparent plate D16, a door D18 (sometimes referred to as a door unit D18, a glass door D18), an upper ball plate D20, a lower ball plate D22, and the like. Includes launch handle D44. First, the outer frame D12 is a frame body for fixing the pachinko gaming machine at a position where it should be installed. The front frame D14 is a frame body that matches the opening portion of the outer frame D12, and is attached to the outer frame D12 so as to be openable and closable via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The front frame D14 includes a mechanism for launching a game ball, a mechanism for detachably accommodating the game board, a mechanism for guiding or collecting the game ball, and the like. The transparent plate D16 is formed of glass or the like and is supported by the door D18. The door D18 is openably and closably attached to the front frame D14 via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The upper ball plate D20 has a mechanism for storing the game ball, sending the game ball to the launch rail, and extracting the game ball from the lower ball plate D22. The lower ball plate D22 has a mechanism for storing and extracting game balls. Further, a speaker D24 is provided between the upper ball plate D20 and the lower ball plate D22, and sound effects according to the game state and the like are output.

Next, the game board is formed with a game area D30 partitioned by an outer rail D32 and an inner rail D34. In the game area D30, in addition to mechanisms such as a plurality of game nails and windmills (not shown) and various general winning openings, the first main game start opening (A10, A10-2), the second main game start opening B10, Auxiliary game start port H10, auxiliary game electric accessory E10, first non-electric accessory HD-1, second non-electric accessory HD-2, first major winning opening C10, second major winning opening C20, first main Game symbol display device A20, second main game symbol display device B20, effect display device SG, auxiliary game symbol display device H20, center decoration D38 (not shown) and out openings (D36, D36-2), general winning openings P10 Is installed. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail in order.

Next, the first main game start openings A10 and A10-2 are installed as start winning openings corresponding to the first main game. As a specific configuration, the first main game start port A10 includes a first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s, and the first main game start port A10-2 is a first main game start port entry ball detection device. A11s-2 (not shown) is provided. Here, the first main game start opening ball entry detection device A11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first main game start opening A10, and is a first main game start opening entry ball detection device A11s-2. Is a sensor that detects the entry of the game ball into the first main game start opening A10-2, and generates the first main game start opening entry information indicating the entry at the time of entry. The first main game starting port A10-2 is provided as the first non-electric accessory HD-1, and the auxiliary game electric accessory E10 (specific entry port) for opening the first non-electric accessory HD-1. When a game ball enters the first open ball opening N1 in the distribution ball opening C20), the first non-electric accessory HD-1 is closed by a mechanical operating mechanism (not shown). It becomes an open state, and the game ball can enter the first main game start port A10-2. When a predetermined number (for example, 2 balls) of game balls enter after the first non-electric accessory HD-1 is opened, the first non-electric accessory HD-1 is physically closed due to the weight of the entered game balls or the like. The first non-electric accessory HD-1 and the second main game start port HD-2, which will be described later, are so-called second-class non-electric accessories (also called mechanical chews), and are of game balls that have won prizes in other winning openings. It is mechanically opened by the action, and is closed by the entry of the game ball into the winning opening (here, the first main game starting opening A10-2 and the second main game starting opening B10) related to the second type non-electric accessory. It is a configuration that becomes.

Next, the second main game start opening B10 is installed as a start winning opening corresponding to the second main game. As a specific configuration, the second main game start port B10 includes a second main game start port entry ball detection device B11s. Here, the second main game start port entry detection device B11s is a sensor that detects the entry of the game ball into the second main game start opening B10, and the second main game start indicating the entry at the time of entry. Generates mouth ball information. The second main game start port B10 is provided as the second non-electric accessory HD-2, and the second open ball in the auxiliary game electric accessory E10 for opening the second non-electric accessory HD-2. When the game ball enters the mouth N2, the second non-electric accessory HD-2 is changed from the closed state to the open state by a mechanical operating mechanism (not shown), and the game ball enters the second main game start port B10. The ball becomes possible. When a predetermined number (for example, 2 balls) of game balls enter after the second main game non-electric accessory HD-2 is opened, the second main game non-electric accessory HD-2 is physically closed due to the weight of the entered game balls or the like.

Next, the auxiliary game start port H10 includes an auxiliary game start port entry ball detection device H11s. Here, the auxiliary game start opening ball entry detection device H11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the auxiliary game start opening H10, and generates auxiliary game start opening entry information indicating the entry at the time of entry. do. The entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game start port H10 triggers a lottery for opening the auxiliary game electric accessory E10.

Next, the auxiliary game electric accessory E10 includes an auxiliary game electric accessory ball entry detection device E10s. Further, the auxiliary game electric accessory E10 includes a distribution device FS, a first open ball entry port N1, and a second open ball entry port N2. The game ball that has entered the auxiliary game electric accessory E10 is sorted so as to enter either the first open ball opening N1 or the second open ball opening N2 by the sorting member FB of the sorting device FS. As described above, the first open ball entry port N1 is an entry port for changing the first non-electric accessory HD-1 from the closed state to the open state, and the second open ball entry port N2 is This is an entrance for changing the second non-electric accessory HD-2 from the closed state to the open state.

Next, a first large winning opening C10 and a second large winning opening C20 are provided on the upper right side of the out opening D36, and the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is , It is configured to easily pass through the area where the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20 are arranged before reaching the out opening D36.

Next, the first big winning opening C10 has a horizontal rectangular shape that is opened when the first main game symbol (first special symbol) or the second main game symbol (second special symbol) stops the big hit symbol. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is located on the upper right side of the completed out opening D36. As a specific configuration, the first large winning opening C10 includes the first large winning opening winning detection device C11s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and the first large winning opening electric accessory C11d (and the first large winning opening). The mouth electric accessory solenoid C13) is provided. Here, the first large winning opening winning detection device C11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first large winning opening C10, and the first large winning opening entry information indicating the entry at the time of entry. To generate. The first large winning opening electric accessory C11d changes the first large winning opening C10 into a normal state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to win in the first large winning opening C10 and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win (the first). 1 Large winning opening The electric accessory solenoid C13 is excited and changed). In the present embodiment, the mode of the large winning opening is changed to a normal state in which the game ball has a horizontal rectangular shape and the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win, and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win. Not limited to. In that case, for example, an advanced state in which the rod-shaped member provided in the large winning opening is projected toward the player side and a retracted state in which the rod-shaped member is retracted toward the player side can be adopted (so-called so-called). A tongue-type attacker) or an opening on the passage where the game ball can roll is used as a big winning opening, and the opening can be closed or opened (so-called slide-type attacker). It is often suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entered into the large winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

Next, the second big winning opening C20 has a horizontal rectangular shape and is located on the upper right side of the out opening D36, which is opened when the second main game symbol (special symbol) stops at the small hit symbol. It is a winning slot corresponding to the main game. As a specific configuration, the second major winning opening C20 includes a second major winning opening winning detection device C21s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a second major winning opening electric accessory C21d (and a second major winning opening). The mouth electric accessory solenoid C23) is provided. Here, the second special winning opening winning detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second major winning opening C20, and the second major winning opening entry information indicating the entry at the time of entry. To generate. The game ball that has entered the second special winning opening C20 is configured to be detected by the second large winning opening winning detection device C21s. Next, the second major winning opening electric accessory C21d has the second major winning opening C20 in a normal state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to win in the second major winning opening C20 and in an open state in which the game ball is easily won. Make it variable. In the present embodiment, the mode of the large winning opening is changed to a normal state in which the game ball has a horizontal rectangular shape and the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win, and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win. Not limited to. In that case, for example, an advanced state in which the rod-shaped member provided in the large winning opening is projected toward the player side and a retracted state in which the rod-shaped member is retracted toward the player side can be adopted (so-called so-called). A tongue-type attacker) or an opening on the passage where the game ball can roll is used as a big winning opening, and the opening can be closed or opened (so-called slide-type attacker). , It is suitable when it is desired to guarantee that the number of balls entered into the large winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10). The second big winning opening C20 may be configured to be open even when the second main game symbol is stopped at a symbol other than the small hit symbol, for example, when the second main game symbol is stopped at the big hit symbol. good.

Next, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) is related to the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) corresponding to the first main game (second main game). It is a device that executes the displayed display. As a specific configuration, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) includes a first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit B21g) and a first main game symbol display unit B21g. It is provided with a symbol hold display unit A21h (second main game symbol hold display unit B21h). Here, the first main game symbol hold display unit A21h (second main game symbol hold display unit B21h) is composed of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps is the first main game (second main game). Corresponds to the number of pending random numbers related to (the number of fluctuations in the main game symbol that has not been executed). The first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit B21g) is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) is "0" to "9". It is displayed with 10 kinds of numbers of "" and "-" of the loss {However, it is not limited to this, and the 7-segment LED is displayed so that it is difficult for the player to recognize which main game symbol is displayed. It is preferable to use and display by a symbol or the like. Further, the holding number display is not limited to being composed of four lamps, and is configured to be able to display a maximum of four holding numbers (for example, it is composed of one lamp and is held). Number 1: Lighting, Number of Holds 2: Low-speed blinking, Number of Holds 3: Medium-speed blinking, Number of Holds 4: High-speed blinking).

Since the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) does not necessarily have to have a staging role, in the present embodiment, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). The size of is set to be inconspicuous. However, the first decorative symbol (which is composed of a plurality of elements such as characters and numbers and is also called the main decorative symbol) or the second decorative symbol has a staging role in the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) itself. When adopting a method that does not display decorative symbols (basically composed of only numbers and also called sub-decorative symbols), the first main game symbol is displayed on a liquid crystal display such as the staging display device SG described later. (2nd main game symbol) may be configured to be displayed.

Next, the effect display device SG is a device that displays an effect image including a decorative symbol that fluctuates / stops in conjunction with the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. Here, as a specific configuration, the effect display device SG includes a display area SG10 in which the effect is executed including the variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the display area SG10 has a first hold display unit SG12 (and a second hold display unit SG13) that displays the main game hold information, and the change suggestion display unit that can suggest the jackpot expectation of the symbol change being executed. It has an SG 14 and, for example, a decorative symbol display area SG 11 for displaying a moving image of a plurality of rows of decorative symbol variations imitating a game of a slot machine. Although the effect display device SG is configured by a liquid crystal display in the present embodiment, it may be configured by other display means such as a mechanical drum or an LED. Next, the first hold display unit SG12 (and the second hold display unit SG13) is composed of four lamps, and the lamps are interlocked with the hold lamps of the main game symbol.

Next, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 is a device that executes display and the like related to the auxiliary game symbol. As a specific configuration, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 includes an auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g and an auxiliary game symbol hold display unit H21h. Here, the auxiliary game symbol hold display unit H21h is composed of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps corresponds to the number of reserved auxiliary game symbol changes (the number of auxiliary game symbol changes that have not been executed).

Next, the center decoration D38 is installed around the effect display device SG, includes a movable body accessory YK, and has functions such as a flow path of a game ball, protection of the effect display device SG, and decoration.

Next, the game effect lamp D26 is provided in an area other than the game area D30 or the game area D30, and plays a role of staging by blinking or the like. The game effect lamp D26 is also provided in the center decoration, and plays a role of directing by blinking or the like.

Next, the general winning opening P10 includes the general winning opening winning detection device C21s. When the general winning opening winning detection device C21s detects the winning of a game ball, a predetermined number of winning balls are played.

Next, the sub input button SB is an operation member electrically connected to the sub control board S, and by operating (pressing), an effect based on the operation is executed. As the operation mode of the sub input button SB, a single press (operation mode in which the sub input button SB is pressed only once for a short time), repeated hits (operation mode in which the sub input button SB is pressed multiple times), and a long press are performed. (Operation mode in which the sub-input button SB is continuously pressed for a predetermined period), and may be configured to have. The cross-shaped key SB-2 has four operation units, which are electrically connected to the sub-control board S, up, down, left, and right. Can be selected, and the notice can be customized. Further, the operation member from which the effect based on the operation is executed by operating (pressing) is not limited to the sub input button SB and the cross key SB-2, and is electrically connected to the sub control board S. In addition, it may be configured to have a lever for performing an effect (moving body accessory is activated, etc.) by pulling it toward you, a stick for input by tilting it back and forth and left and right, and the like.

Next, with reference to FIG. 2, the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine will be described. The pachinko gaming machine controls the overall operation of the pachinko gaming machine, and controls the overall gaming operation (that is, the game, such as a lottery when the ball enters the first main game starting port A10 (second main game starting port B10). Mainly the main control board M that performs control that is directly related to the interests of the pachinko machine, and the sub-main control unit SM that performs display control related to various effects on the effect display device SG that gives interest to the game content. The sub-sub control unit SS that executes the effect display, the prize ball tank KT, the prize ball rail KR, and the prize ball that pays out the game balls supplied from the prize ball tank KT to the upper ball plate D20 according to the prizes in each prize opening. The game area includes a prize ball payout device (set base) KE provided with a payout unit KE10, a prize ball payout control board KH for controlling the payout operation by the prize ball payout unit KE10, and a game ball (reservoir ball) of the upper ball plate D20. With a launch control board D40 that controls the launch operation of the launch device D42 that launches one ball at a time to D30, a power supply unit E that supplies power to each part of the pachinko gaming machine, and a switch that turns the power of the pachinko gaming machine on and off. A certain power switch Ea or the like is provided on the back surface of the front frame D14 (the side opposite to the game side).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4, the structure of the prize ball payout unit KE10 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment and the operating principle for paying out the game balls will be described. First, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 3, the prize ball payout unit KE10 has a payout motor (sometimes referred to as a stepping motor) KE10m driven at the time of payout. Then, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 3, the prize ball payout unit KE10 has a sprocket KE10p connected to the stepping motor KE10m. The prize ball payout unit KE10 having such a structure operates according to the following principle. First, when a game ball enters the winning opening in the game area, a winning signal is sent to the main control board M, the main control board M determines the number of payouts, and the prize ball signal is transmitted to the prize ball payout control board KH. do. Alternatively, a request for ball lending is made from a game ball lending device such as a card unit R to the prize ball payout control board KH. In response to this, the prize ball payout control board KH operates the prize ball payout unit KE10, and the stepping motor KE10m in the prize ball payout unit KE10 executes the payout of the game ball. As shown in FIG. 4, the rotation of the stepping motor KE10m causes the sprocket KE10p (a member in which the first sprocket KE10p1, the second sprocket KE10p2, and the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 are integrated) to rotate, and the game ball is rotated. It will be paid out one by one. Further, the paid out game balls are detected by the payout count sensor KE10s continuously provided downstream of the prize ball payout unit KE10. As for the cross sections CC, it should be added that, as shown in the figure, the cross section along the flow path of the game ball (the flow path is easy to see) is shown.

Further, the lower part of FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing a rotor position confirmation sensor (payout motor position sensor) KE10ms and a rotating body (sprocket) KE10p (one example). The rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms has a pair of measuring units, and is a photo sensor that detects an object between the measuring units by transmitting and receiving light. Here, the pair of measuring units are a light emitting unit that emits light and a light receiving unit that receives light from the light emitting unit, and are arranged so as to sandwich the rotation confirmation member KE10p3. Here, the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 has six recesses formed along the circumference, and is turned off when the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 is interposed between the light projecting portion and the light receiving portion. When the rotation confirmation member KE10p3 is not interposed between the light emitting part and the light receiving part, it is turned on (the state in the lower part of FIG. 3).

Next, the electrical schematic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment pays out the game balls based on the main control board M that controls the progress of the game and the information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M. Various effects on the effect display device SG such as fluctuation / stop of decorative symbols based on the information (signals, commands, etc.) from the prize ball payout control board KH to be controlled and the sound from the speaker D24. The sub-control board S that controls the lighting of the game effect lamp D26, the execution of error notification, etc. (in this example, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are arranged on one board) and these. It is mainly composed of a power supply unit E that supplies power to the entire game machine including the control board, and various devices / devices controlled by each of the above-mentioned control boards or input to the control board are game machines. It is provided at an appropriate place.

The sub-control board S includes a sub-main control unit SM that controls various effects on the effect display device SG such as fluctuation / stop of decorative symbols, sound from the speaker D24, lighting of the game effect lamp D26, and error notification. It is provided with two control units, a sub-sub control unit SS, which executes display processing such as variable display / stop display, hold display, and notice display of decorative symbols on the effect display device SG.

Here, the main control board M, the prize ball payout control board KH, the sub-main control unit SM, and the sub-sub control unit SS include a CPU that performs various arithmetic processes, and a ROM that stores in advance a program that defines the arithmetic processing of the CPU. It is equipped with a RAM that temporarily stores data handled by the CPU (various data generated during the game, computer programs read from the ROM, etc.). Hereinafter, the schematic configuration of each board and the mode of electrical connection between each board / device will be outlined.

First, the main control board M is an electric member of each first main game-related electric member, an electric member of each second main game-related electric member, an electric member of each first and second shared main game member, and each auxiliary game-related. It is electrically connected to an electric member (input / output device) that is indispensable for the progress of the game, such as an electric member of the electric member, and controls the progress of the game based on an input signal from each input device. The electric members of each main game-related electric member and the auxiliary game-related electric member will be described later. Further, the main control board M is also electrically connected to the prize ball payout control board KH and the sub control board S (sub-main control unit SM / sub-sub control unit SS), and the prize ball is paid out based on the progress of the game. Information (commands) related to the above and the like can be transmitted to the prize ball payout control board KH, and information (commands) related to the progress state of the production / game can be transmitted to the sub-control board S. The main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC or the like via an external connection terminal (not shown), and the main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC via an external connection terminal by wiring. It is configured to be able to output game-related information to an external device.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 5, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are configured to enable bidirectional communication, while the main control board M and the sub-main are configured. The control unit SM is configured to enable one-way communication from the main control board M to the sub-main control unit SM (either serial communication or parallel communication may be used as the communication method). The communication between the control boards (between the control devices) may be one-way communication or two-way communication.

Next, the prize ball payout control board KH is a prize ball payout device KE that executes the payout of the game ball, and a device that can be operated by the player and receives a request for lending the game ball to the prize ball payout control board KH. It is connected to the game ball lending device R for transmission and the launch control board D40 for controlling the launch device (handle unit HU100, ball launch unit BU100, etc.). In this embodiment, the gaming ball lending device R is separated from the gaming machine and adjacent to the gaming machine, but it may be integrated with the gaming machine. In that case, the gaming ball lending control board KH is used for lending. Control and management control of recording media for lending such as electronic money may be supervised.

Next, the sub-control board S is configured to change the execution mode of the effect by operating the effect display device SG for displaying the decorative design, the advance notice effect, etc., the speaker D24, the game effect lamp D26, and the button effect. A sub-input button that is configured so that the settings of the game machine can be changed (details will be described later) by operating on the customization execution screen, volume control screen, light amount control screen, etc. It is connected to the SB and the cross key SB-2. In the present embodiment, as described above, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are provided in the sub-control board S, and the sub-main control unit SM controls the sound output from the speaker D24 and the game effect ( Decoration) Lighting control of the lamp D26, determination control of the display content to be displayed on the effect display device SG, and display control of the effect based on the operation of the sub input button SB and the cross key SB-2 are performed by the sub-sub control unit SS. , It is configured to control the display on the effect display device SG. In the present embodiment, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are configured to be integrated by the sub-control board S, but the present invention is not limited to this (configured as a separate board). However, by configuring it to be integrated, there are merits such as space merit and reduction of the situation where noise is mixed in the wiring etc.). Further, the division of work between both control units can be appropriately changed, for example, voice control is executed by the sub-sub control unit SS (suitable when a voice control circuit integrated with VDP is adopted). Further, an electronic value may be given without giving a physical prize ball as a prize ball. Here, the effect controlled by the sub-main control unit SM includes the variation of the first main game symbol and the variation of the second main game symbol and the variation of the decorative symbol in a time-synchronized manner, and is included in the result of the game. It is related to the display of only information that does not affect.

Next, the game-related electric members will be described. As shown in the figure, in the game machine according to the present embodiment, as the game-related electric members, the first main game-related electric member A, which is the game-related electric member on the first main game side, and the second main game side. The second main game-related electric member B, which is the game-related electric member, and the first and second main game-related electric members C, which are the game-related electric members shared between the first main game side and the second main game side. And an auxiliary game-related electric member H, which is a game-related electric member on the auxiliary game side. The main control board M includes the first main game-related electric member A, the second main game-related electric member B, the first and second main game sharing-related electric members C, and the auxiliary game-related electric member H. It is electrically connected. The main control board M includes a control signal, a drive signal, and the like on the first main game-related electric member A, the second main game-related electric member B, the first and second main game shared electric member C, and the auxiliary game-related electric member H. Various signals of the above are output, and are output from the first main game-related electric member A, the second main game-related electric member B, the first and second main game sharing-related electric members C, and the auxiliary game-related electric member H. Various signals such as sensor signals are input to the main control board M. Hereinafter, these game-related electric members will be described in order.

First, the first main game-related electric member A is an electric member related to the first main game. For example, as the electric member of the first main game-related electric member A, the ball enters the first main game symbol display device A20 capable of stopping display and variable display of the first main game symbol, and the first main game start port A10. There is a first main game start opening ball entry detection device A11s (first main game start opening ball entry detection device A11s-2) and the like capable of detecting. The main control board M outputs a control signal to the first main game symbol display device A20. Further, the detection signal output from the first main game start opening ball entry detection device A11s (first main game start opening ball entry detection device A11s-2) is input to the main control board M.

Next, the second main game-related electric member B is an electric member related to the second main game. For example, as the electric member of the second main game-related electric member B, the ball enters the second main game symbol display device B20 capable of stopping display and variable display of the second main game symbol, and the second main game start port B10. There is a second main game start opening ball entry detection device B11s and the like capable of detecting. The main control board M outputs a control signal to the second main game symbol display device B20. Further, the detection signal output from the second main game start port entry ball detection device B11s is input to the main control board M.

Next, the first and second main game shared electric members C are electric members related to both the first main game and the second main game. For example, as the 1st and 2nd main game shared electric member C, the 1st big winning opening electric accessory solenoid C13 (not shown) of the 1st big winning opening C10 and the 2nd big winning opening C20 of the 2nd big winning opening C20. There is a mouth electric accessory solenoid C23 (not shown) and the like. Further, as the first and second main game shared electric members C, the first large prize opening winning detection device C11s, which is a sensor for detecting the entry of a game ball into the first large winning opening C10, and the second large winning opening. There is also a second large winning opening winning detection device C21s, which is a sensor for detecting the entry of a game ball into the C20. The main control board M outputs a drive signal to the first special winning opening electric accessory solenoid C13 and the second special winning opening electric accessory solenoid C23. Further, the sensor signals output from the first special winning opening winning detection device C11s and the second special winning opening winning detection device C21s are input to the main control board M.

Next, the auxiliary game-related electric member H is an electric member related to the auxiliary game. For example, as the auxiliary game-related electric member H, a solenoid (not shown) for driving the second main game start port electric accessory B11d provided in the second main game start port B10, a stop display and variation of the auxiliary game symbol. There are an auxiliary game symbol display device H20 capable of displaying, an auxiliary game start port entry ball detection device H11s capable of detecting entry into the auxiliary game start opening H10, and the like. The main control board M outputs a drive signal to the solenoid that drives the second main game start port electric accessory B11d, and outputs a control signal to the auxiliary game symbol display device H20. Further, the detection signal output from the auxiliary game start port entry ball detection device H11s is input to the main control board M.

The electric member of the first main game symbol display device A20, the electric member of the second main game symbol display device B20, and the electric member of the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are connected to the main control board M so as to be able to transmit information. .. Further, the electric members constituting the effect display device SG are connected to the sub-main control unit SM so as to be able to transmit information. That is, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are controlled by the main control board M, and the effect display device SG is controlled by the sub-main control unit SM. Means that. It should be noted that another game peripheral device may be controlled via the main control board M and another control board controlled by one-way communication (one-way communication).

Next, FIG. 6 is a main flowchart showing a general flow of processing performed by the main control board M. After the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the process of the figure (a) is executed. That is, after the power of the gaming machine is turned on and the initial setting is performed (not shown), in step 1001, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting key switch provided on the main control board M is off. To judge. If Yes in step 1001, the process proceeds to step 1002. If No in step 1001 (when the setting key switch is operated), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the process of step 1003 (the setting change process described later) and proceeds to the process of step 1004. .. In step 1002, the CPUMC of the main control board M confirms the input port of the RAM clear button (sometimes referred to as a reset button, a RAM clear switch, a setting change button, etc.) provided on the prize ball payout control board KH. It is determined whether or not the RAM clear button has been operated, that is, whether or not an operation for intentionally clearing the contents of the RAM has been performed by the administrator of the game hall or the like. In the case of Yes in step 1002, in step 1004, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears all the RAM contents on the main control board M side. Next, in step 1006, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits RAM clear information (command) indicating that the RAM of the main control board M has been cleared to the sub-main control unit SM side (transmitted at the relevant timing). Alternatively, the command may be set at the timing and transmitted by the control command transmission process described later), and the process proceeds to step 1015. On the other hand, if No in step 1002, in step 1007, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the information indicating that the power is normally turned off is not stored in the RAM. In the case of Yes in step 1007, in step 1008, the CPUMC of the main control board M checks the contents of the RAM area in the main control board M (for example, it is stored in the checksum and the RAM area recorded at the time of power failure. Compare with the amount of information). Next, in step 1010, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the contents of the RAM are normal (whether or not the information at the time of power failure is accurately backed up in the RAM) based on the check result. do. If Yes, that is, the data backed up in the RAM is abnormal in step 1010, the process proceeds to the process of step 1004 (the RAM clear process described above). On the other hand, if No, that is, information indicating that the power was normally turned off is stored in the RAM in step 1007, or if No, that is, the data backed up in the RAM is normal in step 1010, in step 1012, The CPUMC of the main control board M acquires various information commands stored (backed up) in the RAM of the main control board M at the time of power failure, and in step 1014, the acquired various information commands are transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side. (It may be transmitted at the relevant timing, or a command may be set at the relevant timing and the control command transmission process described later may be configured to transmit the data), and in step 1014-1, the main control The CPUMC of the board M changes the return setting of the solenoid {the auxiliary game electric accessory E10, the large winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) to the open or closed state before the power is turned off. In order to restore, it is judged whether the solenoid operation bit is on or not in the order of the electric accessory and the big prize opening, and if it is on, (the auxiliary game electric accessory E10 / the big winning opening is opened before the power is turned off. (In order to determine that it is inside and open it again), store the solenoid operation flag in the corresponding address}, and proceed to the process of step 1015. In step 1015, the CPUMC of the main control board M saves information indicating that the power has been turned on normally in the RAM, and proceeds to the process of step 1016. Next, in step 1016, the CPUMC of the main control board M is triggered by a timer interrupt (for example, a hardware interrupt every about 1.5 ms) related to the main process on the main control board M side shown by FIG. 8B. However, in this example, the interrupt cycle is T), {as a result, (b) of FIG. 8 is executed when the execution scheduled interrupt timing is reached}, and the process of step 1018. Move to. After step 1018, the CPUMC of the main control board M repeatedly executes various random number update processes (for example, random number counter increment processes) until the next timer interrupt timing is reached.

In this example, the gaming machine has a plurality of setting values, but the correspondence between the operation mode of the setting change button and the change of the setting value of the gaming machine can be freely designed as appropriate. For example, if the number of set values is 6 (the set value is any of "1" to "6") and the set value at the time of turning on the power is "6", the setting change button is operated once. , The setting value becomes "5", and when the setting change button is operated three times, the setting value becomes "3". (Similarly, the set value may be sequentially moved up from "1" to "6" according to the number of operations of the setting change button). In this case, the setting is changed when the setting value is the lower limit, such that when the setting change button is operated once while the setting value is "1", the setting value becomes "6". When the button is operated, the set value may be configured to shift to the upper limit value. Similarly, the setting value is incremented according to the number of operations of the setting change button, and when the setting change button is operated while the setting value is the upper limit value ("6" in this example). , The set value may be configured to shift to the lower limit value (“1” in this example). Further, the set value may be changed sequentially by pressing and holding the operation button.

The setting change button and the RAM clear button may be provided as separate operation members, or the role of the setting change button and the RAM clear button may be shared by one operation member.

The number of set values can be freely designed, for example, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and the like. The smaller the number of set values (for example, when the number of set values is 2 or 3), the simpler the configuration of the game machine while improving the fun of the game based on having a plurality of set values. The larger the number of set values (for example, when the number of set values is 5 or 6), the more interesting the game can be.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the flow of the setting change process. When the setting change process is started, a command indicating that the setting change process has started is set in step 1003-1 and transmitted to the sub-control board S. As a result, the sub-control board S can display "in the setting change mode" or the like on the effect display device. At the same time, it is output to the external terminal board as an outer end signal (security signal). In step 1003-2, it is confirmed whether or not the set value (set value data) is within the normal range (“1” to “6”), and if Yes, the process proceeds to step 1003-4. If No in step 1003-2, that is, if the set value (set value data) is determined to be an abnormal value other than "1" to "6", the minimum payout rate is set in step 1003-3. The value (set value data) "1" is set, and the process proceeds to step 1003-4. In steps 1003-4, it may be referred to as a special symbol display device (first main game symbol display device A20 or second main game symbol display device B20) in a display mode (for example, all lighting) indicating that the setting is being changed. ) Is turned on, and at the same time, the current set value is displayed on the set value display device provided on the main control board M. Next, in step 1003-5, it is confirmed whether or not there is an input of the setting change button, and if No, the process proceeds to step 1003-11. If Yes in step 1003-5, the setting value data switched by the setting change button in step 1003-6 is acquired, and the process proceeds to step 1003-7. In step 1003-7, it is confirmed whether or not the current set value (set value data) is the maximum value, and if Yes, the process proceeds to step 1003-9, and 1 is set as the set value (set value data). to add. If No in step 1003-7, that is, if it is determined that the set value (set value data) is the maximum "6", the minimum payout rate "1" is set in step 1003-8. At the same time, the process proceeds to the process of steps 1003-9, and 1 is added to the set value (set value data). Subsequently, the set value data is updated in step 1003-10, and it is confirmed in step 1003-11 whether or not there is a fall of the set key signal. In step 1003-11, if there is no falling edge of the setting key signal, the process proceeds to the process of step 1003-5, and the process of step 1003-5 to the process of step 1003-11 until the falling edge of the setting key signal is confirmed. repeat. In the case of Yes in step 1003-11, that is, when it is determined that the setting key switch has returned to the state before the setting change, the setting is being changed by turning off all the LEDs of the special symbol display device in step 1003-12. After clearing the display mode indicating that, in step 1003-13, a command indicating that the setting change process is completed is set and transmitted to the sub-control board S. As a result, the sub-control board S hides the "setting change mode" being displayed on the effect display device, and stops the output to the external terminal board. After the process of step 1003-13 is completed, the process proceeds to the process of step 1004 of this process, and RAM clear is executed. Although "1" to "6" have been described as the setting value data managed by the RAM throughout the entire processing, the processing may be performed by replacing them with the setting value data "0" to "5", respectively. .. By doing so, when RAM clear occurs due to a RAM abnormality, it is possible to avoid an abnormality determination (No in step 1003-2) due to the setting of "0" in the value of the RAM that manages the set value data. Can be done. When the set value data is managed by "0" to "5" (at this time, in the case of three-step setting, it is managed by "0" to "2"), "0" is treated as the set value data. Therefore, it is not judged to be abnormal. Further, when some kind of lottery is performed using the set value data (for example, when different data is selected for each set value in the look-ahead table or the like), there is an advantage that the offset processing in the table selection can be easily performed. Specifically, when managing the set value data from "1" to "6", when using it as it is as offset data for table selection, it is necessary to perform processing such as decrementing the start address by -1. When the value data is managed from "0" to "5", the value as it is can be used as offset data. When actually displaying the set value data on the set value display device, it is displayed as "1" to "6" by adding 1 to the set value data.

In this example, it is configured to determine whether or not the set value (set value data) is within the normal range in step 1003-2, in other words, to execute the confirmation process of the set value (set value data). However, as the execution timing of the confirmation process,
(1) Timing immediately after turning on the power (2) Timing of entering the designated ball entry port (3) Timing of entry into the main game start port (4) Timing of entry into the auxiliary game start port (5) Grand prize Timing of entering the ball into the mouth (6) Timing of starting the main game symbol change (7) Timing immediately after the game state is switched (8) Timing immediately after the start of the big hit (9) Timing immediately after the end of the big hit Execute at the above timing May be good. The confirmation process of the set value (set value data) may be executed only at one of the above nine timings, or the set value (set value data) may be executed at a plurality of timings of the above nine timings. Confirmation processing may be executed. For example, since it is configured to execute checksum processing when the power is turned on, it is not necessary to provide a process to check only the set value (set value data). It may be configured not to execute the confirmation process of the setting value data).

Next, FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the flow of timer interrupt processing performed by the main control board M. The CPUMC of the main control board M executes the process of FIG. 3B based on the interrupt request generated when the scheduled interrupt timing is reached. That is, when the scheduled interrupt cycle T is reached (for example, a hardware interrupt every about 1.5 ms), in step 1000-S, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the setting key operation determination process described later. , The process proceeds to step 1000-1.

The setting key operation judgment process determines whether or not the setting key switch is operated (whether or not the setting key is input to the setting key insertion slot and whether or not the setting change key switch is in the ON state. It is a process (determining whether or not, etc.). When it is determined that there is an operation of the setting key switch in the setting key operation judgment processing in the timer interrupt processing (that is, the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot and the setting key is rotated in a predetermined direction. As a result, when the key switch for changing the setting is in the ON state), the setting value of the current gaming machine is displayed on a predetermined display device (setting value display device in this example).

Next, in step 1000-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the input process described later. Next, in step 1000-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes various random number update processes described later. Next, in step 1000-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the initial value update type random number update process described later. Next, in step 1000-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the initial value random number update process described later. Next, in step 1000-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the timer subtraction process described later. Next, in step 1000-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a start port 2 valid period setting process (a process of setting the valid period of the second main game start port B10), which will be described later. Next, in step 1000-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the winning monitoring process described later. Next, in step 3000, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the prize ball payout command transmission control process described later. When a game ball wins in each winning opening, the number of winning balls paid out is 3 for the 1st main game starting port A10, 1 for the 1st main game starting port A10-2, and 1 for the 2nd main game starting port B10. 1 ball, auxiliary game electric accessory E10 (distribution ball opening C20) 1 ball, 1st big winning opening C10 15 balls, 2nd big winning opening C20 5 balls, left general winning opening (general winning opening) The P10 (which may also be referred to as) has 10 balls, and the right general winning opening P20 (not shown in FIG. 1 and the like) has 10 balls. It should be noted that the number of these prize balls paid out is an example, and the number of prize balls paid out is the same or different between the case where the ball is entered into the first main game start opening A10 and the case where the ball is entered into the second main game start opening B10. The number of prize balls paid out may be the same or different between the case where the ball is entered in the first large winning opening C10 and the case where the ball is entered in the second large winning opening C20. However, the number of prize balls in all the winning openings provided in the pachinko gaming machine according to this example does not exceed 15 for one winning (winning ball), and is constant (abnormal) regardless of the gaming state. (Except when it is invalidated due to circumstances or an error is occurring), and it is configured so that prize balls are not paid out except for winning, while realizing various gaming states. , The result of the direct game is summarized in "whether or not the launched game ball wins a predetermined winning opening".

In this example, since the specific prize ball payout control process is performed not by the main control board M but by the prize ball payout control board KH, the main control board M manages the progress of the payout control in real time. It is difficult to make a prize, and if there is an obstacle due to a sudden matter such as a power outage during the payout for a prize of one game ball, it may not be possible to obtain an accurate number of prize balls. Therefore, in this example, the retry function at the time of abnormality in which the game ball is paid out again for the prize (for example, when the game ball wins in the first main game start opening A10 and one game ball is paid out). It has a function of executing the payout of the remaining three game balls after the power is turned off and then the power is restored. Of course, by adding a backup function to the prize ball payout control board KH, it is possible to realize an accurate number of prize ball payouts even when such an abnormality occurs. In this case, retry at the time of abnormality is possible. It is not necessary to provide a function.

Next, in step 2000, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the ball entry detection process described later. Next, in step 1100, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process described later. Next, in step 1200, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the electric accessory drive determination process described later. Next, in step 1250, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the distribution member drive control process described later. Next, in step 1280, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the first non-electric accessory drive control process described later. Next, in step 1290, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the second non-electric accessory drive control process described later. Next, in step 1300, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the main game content determination random number acquisition process described later. Next, in step 1400, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the main game symbol display process described later. Next, in step 1700, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the small hit game symbol control process described later. Next, in step 1600, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the special game control process described later. Next, in step 1601, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the large winning opening validity period setting process. Next, in step 1550, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the special game operation condition determination process described later. Next, in step 1550-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the abnormality detection process. Next, in step 1550-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the ball entry passage time abnormality detection process. Next, in step 1550-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the game state display process. Next, in step 1550-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the handle state signal inspection process. Next, in step 1550-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the out port monitoring process. Next, in step 1550-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the LED output process. Next, in step 1900, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the fraud detection information management process described later. Next, in step 1950, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the error management process described later. Next, in step 1550-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the emission control signal output process described later. Next, in step 1550-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the test signal output process. Next, in step 1550-9, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the solenoid output process. Next, in step 1999, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a control command transmission process (a command set in each of the above processes is transmitted to the sub-main control unit side). Next, in step 3500, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes an external signal output process described later. Next, in step 1550-11, the CPUMC of the main control board M is set to allow the generation of the timer interrupt, and returns to the process executed immediately before the execution of this interrupt process.

The input process is a process of determining a signal input to the main control board M from an input device such as a sensor and setting a flag or the like corresponding to the signal. In this example, the input process is attached to the game board surface. Switch (for example, 1st main game start opening ball entry detection device A11s, A11s-2, 2nd main game start opening entry ball detection device B11s, auxiliary game start opening entry ball detection device H11s, 1st big winning opening winning detection device C11s, 2nd big prize opening winning detection device C21s, general winning detection device, auxiliary game electric accessory ball entry detection device E10s, etc.), 1st open entry opening for detecting entry into the 1st open entry opening N1 Entry sensor, 2nd open entry port entry sensor that detects entry into the 2nd open entry port N2, out ball count switch that detects entry into the out openings (D36, D36-2), disconnection Short-circuit power supply abnormality detection signal, open signal (for example, front frame D14, door D18, etc.), magnetic detection signal 1 (detection signal by magnetic detection sensor 1), radio wave detection signal, impact detection signal, touch state signal, magnetic detection signal 2 This is a process for monitoring the input of (detection signal by magnetic detection sensor 2). In this example, for a special input such as a RAM clear switch, an input determination or the like is performed by a process different from the input process.

The various random number update processes are processes in which random numbers used in lottery with extremely low influence on the number of balls are updated relatively simply (for example, a constant is added). In this example, ordinary symbol variation pattern random numbers (for example, are added). , Auxiliary game symbol variation mode random number) and variation pattern random number (for example, variation mode lottery random number) are updated.

The initial value update type random number update process is a process for updating a random number used in a lottery that has a certain effect on the number of balls (a process different from the above-mentioned various random number update processes), and is usually used in this example. Random numbers per symbol (for example, auxiliary game symbol winning random numbers), normal symbol symbol random numbers (for example, auxiliary game symbol stop symbol random numbers), special symbol symbol random numbers (for example, symbol lottery random numbers), soft random numbers per special symbol described later, etc. are updated. It is a process to do.

The initial value random number update process is a process of updating the random number for determining the initial value of the random number updated by the initial value update type random number update process used in the lottery in which the above-mentioned influence on the ball output occurs to some extent. As an example of the random number to be updated in the example, an initial value random number per ordinary symbol, an initial value random number of the ordinary symbol symbol, an initial value random number of the special symbol symbol, a soft initial value random number per the special symbol, and the like can be exemplified. The initial value random number per normal symbol and the normal symbol initial value random number are random numbers updated by the initial value random number update process when a plurality of auxiliary game content determination random numbers are configured.

The timer subtraction process is a process for updating a 2-byte timer (for example, a timer for managing first and second main game symbol fluctuations, an electric accessory release timer, a special game timer, an opening time timer, etc.).

The start port 2 validity period setting process is a winning opening (for example, the second main) that facilitates winning by operating the ordinary electric accessory depending on the operating state of the ordinary electric accessory (for example, the auxiliary game electric accessory E10). This is a process for setting the validity period of the game start port B10).

The winning monitoring process is a process of updating the pass counter of the switch, creating a security output request to be output to the external terminal board, and requesting the transmission of a command to be transmitted to the staging control board.

The large winning opening valid period setting process is a process of storing the result of determining the valid period of the large winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20). When the specific area C22 is configured to be included in the large winning opening, the result of the valid period determination of the specific area C22 may be saved by the large winning opening valid period setting process.

The anomaly detection process is a process for monitoring magnetism, disconnection / short circuit / power supply, radio wave, glass frame set / game board D35 frame open / closed state, impact monitoring, and the like.

The ball entry passage time abnormality detection process is continuous at each switch level in order to detect the ball entry passage time abnormality when the game ball enters various entry ports (for example, the first main game start port A10). This is a process for monitoring the on-time (continuous on-time of the ball entry sensor).

The game status display processing includes the number of times the special electric accessory is continuously operated (the number of execution rounds in the jackpot), the error status, and the number of balls on hold for the normal symbol display device (currently displayed on the auxiliary game symbol display device H20). (Number of auxiliary game hold balls) and the number of operation hold balls of the special symbol display device (current number of main game hold balls displayed on the first main game symbol display device A20 or the second main game symbol display device B20). It is a process to perform.

The handle state signal inspection process is a process for monitoring the touch state of the launch handle (for example, the launch handle D44).

The out port monitoring process is a process of monitoring the out port (for example, the out port D36) in order to create a security output request.

The LED output processing is a display on the special symbol display device (for example, display of the first main game symbol on the first main game symbol display device A20, display of the second main game symbol on the second main game symbol display device B20, second 1 Display of the number of operation-reserved balls on the first main game side in the main game symbol display device A20, display of the number of operation-reserved balls on the second main game side in the second main game symbol display device B20), display on the normal symbol display device. (Display of auxiliary symbols on the auxiliary game symbol display device H20, display of the number of balls on hold for operation on the auxiliary game side in the auxiliary game symbol display device H20), error status display, game status display, and separate display (for example, right). Initialization and display of the display to display the number of times the special electric accessory operates continuously (displaying the number of rounds in the big hit) and the situation to hit, the situation to hit left) This is a process for sequentially controlling the LED output controlled on the main control board M side such as data output.

The launch control signal output process is a process of outputting a signal for prohibiting or permitting the launch of a game ball, and the details will be described later.

The test signal output process is a process of creating a signal to be output to a test device outside the gaming machine and outputting it to a corresponding output port.

The solenoid output processing is to output the output data of the solenoid of the ordinary electric accessory (for example, the auxiliary game electric accessory E10) and the big winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20). It is a process.

Next, FIG. 9 is a main flowchart showing the flow of NMI interrupt processing (at the time of power interruption) performed by the main control board M. First, NMI interrupt processing will be described. The power cutoff signal from the reset IC is configured to be input to the NMI terminal of the CPU of the main control board M, and the process of FIG. 3C is executed when the power is turned off in the gaming machine. That is, when the power of the gaming machine is turned off (in this example, when the NMI is interrupted), in step 1019-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer is interrupted. In the case of Yes in step 1019-1, in step 1019-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the information indicating that the power has been turned on normally is not stored in the RAM. On the other hand, if No in step 1019-1, the process of step 1019-1 is performed again. In the case of Yes in step 1019-2, in step 1019-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M saves the information indicating that the power is cut off abnormally in the RAM, and proceeds to the next step 1022. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1019-2, in step 1019-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M stores information indicating that the power is normally cut off in the RAM, and in step 1020, the main control board M of the main control board M. The CPUMC sets the power failure information (for example, checksum) based on the information in the RAM area. Next, in step 1022, the CPUMC of the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area, prohibits timer interrupt processing, and shifts to power cutoff waiting loop processing. An example of executing the power failure process (FIG. 9) by inputting the power failure signal to the NMI terminal of the CPU has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the power failure signal is input to a specific input port. It may be set and the power failure may be determined and the power failure process may be performed by monitoring a specific input port in the main control board side main process (FIG. 6) or the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8). The power cut may be referred to as a power cut, and the power cut may be referred to as a power cut, a power cut, or a power cut.

Next, FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout command transmission control process according to the subroutine of step 3000 in FIG. First, in step 3100, the main control board M executes the payout control board transmission control process described later. Next, in step 3200, the main control board M executes the payout control board reception control process described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 2000).

Next, FIG. 11 shows a flowchart of the payout control board transmission control process according to the subroutine of step 3100 of FIG. First, in step 3105, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the payout signal is OFF, that is, whether or not the payout is currently being executed. In the case of Yes in step 3105, in step 3110, whether or not the CPUMC of the main control board M has an unpaid prize ball (a prize ball for which the prize ball payout command has not yet been transmitted to the prize ball payout control board KH side). Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 3110, in step 3115, the CPUMC of the main control board M is an error that is inappropriate for paying out the prize ball. , Ball out error, etc.) is determined. In the case of Yes in step 3115, in step 3120, the CPUMC of the main control board M has a prize ball payout command for the number of prize ball payouts corresponding to the unpaid prize ball information in the order in which the payout process is executed this time (see FIG. 12). ) Is set. Then, in step 3125, the CPUMC of the main control board M deletes the unpaid prize ball information corresponding to the prize ball payout command set this time, and executes a process of shifting the subsequent information. Next, in step 3130, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits the set prize ball payout command to the prize ball payout control board KH side, and shifts to the next process (counter payout control board reception control process in step 3200). do. Even when No in step 3105, step 3110 and step 3115, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 3200).

Next, FIG. 13 shows a flowchart of the payout control board reception control process according to the subroutine of step 3200 of FIG. First, in step 3205, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the payout-related information has been received. Here, in the case of Yes in step 3205, in step 3210, the CPUMC of the main control board M has error information (ball out error, upper plate full tank error, other payout related error) in the received payout related information. Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 3210, in step 3215, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the error flag related to the corresponding error, so that the error information on the prize ball payout control board KH side is transmitted to the main control board M side. But manage (centralized management). On the other hand, if No in step 3210, in step 3220, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the error flag related to the error on the prize ball payout control board KH side. Then, in step 3225, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the prize ball payout completion information exists in the received payout-related information. In the case of Yes in step 3225, in step 3230, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the set prize ball payout command (prize ball payout command related to the completion of this payout), and the next process (step 2000). Process). Even if No in step 3205 and step 3225, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2000).

Next, FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the ball entry detection process according to the subroutine of step 2000 in FIG. First, in step 2100, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the auxiliary game electric accessory ball entry detection process described later. Next, in step 2200, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the main game start port entry ball detection process, which will be described later. Next, in step 2350, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the first (second) winning opening ball detection process described later. Next, in step 2400, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the general winning opening ball detection process described later. Next, in step 2500, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the discharge ball detection process described later. Next, in step 2600, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the out-port / in-ball detection process described later. Next, in step 2700, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the prize ball determination process described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1100).

Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game start opening ball entry detection process according to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. First, in step 2102, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the auxiliary game start port detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2102, in step 2104, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the input from the auxiliary game start opening ball entry detection device H11s for the ball entry detection time (the time or more, the auxiliary game start opening ball entry detection device H11s). When the input is detected, it is determined whether or not it is ON for more than the time (time when it is considered that the ball has entered the auxiliary game start port H10). If Yes in step 2104, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game start flag in step 2106. Next, in step 2108, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game start port detection continuation flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2150).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2102, in step 2110, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the input from the auxiliary game start opening ball entry detection device H11s for the detection end time (the time or more, the auxiliary game start opening ball entry detection device). When the H11s does not detect the input, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than the time (time when it is considered that the game ball has completed passing through the auxiliary game start port entry detection device H11s). In the case of Yes in step 2110, in step 2112, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game start port detection continuation flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2150). Even if No in step 2104 or step 2110, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2150).

Next, FIGS. 16 and 17 are flowcharts of the main game start opening ball entry detection process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. First, in step 2202, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the detection continuation flag of the first main game start port (first main game start port A10) is off. In the case of Yes in step 2202, in step 2204, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the input from the first main game start opening ball entry detection device A11s for the entry detection time (the time or more, the first main game start opening entry). When the ball detection device A11s detects the input, it is determined whether or not the ball detection device A11s is ON for more than the time (time when it is considered that the ball has entered the first main game start port A10). In the case of Yes in step 2204, in step 2206, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first main game start flag. Next, in step 2208, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds (increments) 1 to the ball entry counter value. Next, in step 2210, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first main game start port detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2211, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds (increments) 1 to the counter value of the starting port entry number counter, and proceeds to step 2216.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2202, in step 2212, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the input from the ball entry counter for the detection time (the first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s inputs the input from the ball entry counter). If it is not detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than the time (time when it is considered that the game ball has completed passing through the first main game start port input ball detection device A11s). In the case of Yes in step 2212, in step 2214, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the first main game start port detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2215, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the long-time detection flag of the first main game start port, and proceeds to step 2216. In addition, even if No in step 2204 and step 2212, the process proceeds to step 2216.

Next, in step 2216, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first main game start port confirmation sensor has detected the game ball. In the case of Yes in step 2216, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to (increments) the first main game start opening confirmation counter value in step 2218, and proceeds to step 2220. Even if No in step 2216, the process proceeds to step 2220.

Next, in step 2220, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first main game start port (A10-2) detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2220, in step 2224, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the input from the first main game start port (A10-2) entry detection device for the entry detection time (the time or more, the first main). When the game start port (A10-2) ball entry detection device detects an input, it is determined whether or not it is ON for more than the time (time when it is considered that the ball has entered the first main game start port A10-2). In the case of Yes in step 2224, in step 2226, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first main game start flag. Next, in step 2228, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds (increments) 1 to the ball entry counter value. Next, in step 2230, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first main game start port (A10-2) detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2231, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds (increments) 1 to the counter value of the starting port entry number counter, and proceeds to step 2242.

On the other hand, if No in step 2220, in step 2232, the CPUMC of the main control board M detects the input from the ball entry counter for the detection time (more than that time, the first main game start port (A10-2) entry detection. When the device does not detect the input, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than the time (time when it is considered that the game ball has completed passing through the first main game start port (A10-2) entry ball detection device). In the case of Yes in step 2232, in step 2234, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the first main game start port (A10-2) detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2235, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the long-time detection flag of the first main game start port (A10-2), and proceeds to step 2242. Even if No in step 2224 and step 2232, the process proceeds to step 2242.

Next, in step 2242, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the second main game start port detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2242, in step 2244, the input from the second main game start opening entry ball detection device B11s is the input from the second main game start opening entry ball detection device B11s (the time or more, the second main). When the game start opening ball entry detection device B11s detects an input, it is determined whether or not the second main game start opening B10 is ON for a time) or more. In the case of Yes in step 2244, in step 2245, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the flag is on during the valid period of the second main game start port. In the case of Yes in step 2245, in step 2246, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the second main game start flag. Next, in step 2248, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds (increments) 1 to the ball entry counter value. Next, in step 2250, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the second main game start port detection continuation flag, and proceeds to step 2260.

On the other hand, if No in step 2245 (when the entry of the game ball is detected during the period when the entry into the second main game start port B10 is not valid), the CPUMC of the main control board M is the second in step 2251. 2 It is determined that there is an illegal entry in the main game start opening B10, an illegal entry command for the second main game start opening (command to the sub control board S side) is set, and the process proceeds to step 2260. Even if No in step 2244, the process proceeds to step 2260.

On the other hand, if No in step 2242, in step 2252, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the input from the second main game start port entry detection device B11s for the detection time (the time or more, the second main game start port entry). When the ball detection device B11s does not detect the input, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than the time (time when it is considered that the game ball has completed passing through the second main game start port entry ball detection device B11s). In the case of Yes in step 2252, in step 2254, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the second main game start port detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2258, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the second main game start port long-time detection flag, and proceeds to step 2260. Even if No in step 2252, the process proceeds to step 2260.

Next, in step 2260, in the CPUMC of the main control board M, the first main game start port (A10, A10-2) ball entry detection device (second main game start port entry ball detection device B11s) has an illegal detection time ( It is a time that exceeds the time detected as a normal ball entry, and it is determined whether or not it is ON for more than the time (time for determining that fraud is being performed). In the case of Yes in step 2260, in step 2262, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first (second) main game start port long-time detection flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2350). On the other hand, even if No in step 2260, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2350).

Next, FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the first (second) grand prize opening ball entry detection process according to the subroutine of step 2350 in FIG. First, in step 2352, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first (second) winning opening detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2352, in step 2354, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the input from the first winning opening winning detection device C11s (the second winning opening winning detection device C21s) for the winning ball detection time (the time). As described above, when the ball entry detection device detects the input, it is determined whether or not the ball is ON for more than the time (time when it is considered that the ball has entered the ball entry port). In the case of Yes in step 2354, in step 2355, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the flag is on during the valid period of the first (second) grand prize opening. In the case of Yes in step 2355, in step 2356, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first (second) grand prize opening entry flag. Next, in step 2358, 1 is added (incremented) to the number of balls entered counter value. Next, in step 2360, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first (second) winning opening detection continuation flag, and proceeds to step 2370.

On the other hand, if No in step 2355 (when the entry of the game ball is detected during the period when the entry into the large winning opening is not valid), the CPUMC of the main control board M is illegal in the large winning opening in step 2361. It is determined that there was a bad ball, and the first (second) large winning opening illegal ball entry command (command to the sub control board S side) is set, and the process proceeds to step 2370. Even if No in step 2354, the process proceeds to step 2370.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2352, in step 2362, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the input from the first prize opening prize detection device C11s (second prize opening prize detection device C21s) for the detection time {the time. As mentioned above, when the 1st big prize opening winning detection device C11s (the 2nd big winning opening winning detection device C21s) does not detect the input, the game ball is the 1st big winning opening winning detection device C11s (the 2nd big winning opening winning detection device C11s). It is determined whether or not the time is OFF for the time when it is considered that the passage of the detection device C21s) has been completed. In the case of Yes in step 2362, in step 2364, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the first (second) winning opening detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2368, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the first (second) large winning opening long-time detection flag, and proceeds to step 2370. On the other hand, even if No in step 2362, the process proceeds to step 2370.

Next, in step 2370, in the CPUMC of the main control board M, the input from the first special winning opening winning detection device C11s (second large winning opening winning detection device C21s) is the illegal detection time {the time or more, the first large When the winning opening winning detection device C11s (second major winning opening winning detection device C21s) detects an input, the time for considering that an illegal entry into the first major winning opening C10 (second major winning opening C20) is detected. } Determine whether or not it is ON. In the case of Yes in step 2370, in step 2372, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the first (second) large winning opening long-time detection flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2400). On the other hand, even if No in step 2370, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2400).

Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the general winning opening ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. In addition, the general winning opening (the left general winning opening P10 and the right general winning opening P20 may be collectively referred to as the general winning opening) pays out the prize ball when the game ball enters, but the game General winning opening ball entry detection device P11s (in the present embodiment, which is a ball entry port that does not affect the progress of the game (does not execute a lottery that affects the progress of the game) and is a sensor that detects the entry of the game ball. The general winning opening ball detection device P11s, which is a sensor for detecting the entry of a game ball into the left general winning opening P10, and the general winning opening entry ball, which is a sensor for detecting the entry of a game ball into the right general winning opening P20. It has two general winning opening ball detection devices P11s with a detection device P11s).

First, in step 2402, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the general winning opening detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2402, in step 2404, the CPUMC of the main control board M detects the input from the general winning opening ball entry detection device for the entry detection time (the time or more, the general winning opening entry ball detection device detects the input). Then, it is determined whether or not it is ON for more than the time (time when it is considered that there is a ball in the general winning opening). In the case of Yes in step 2404, in step 2406, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the general winning opening entry flag. Next, in step 2408, the CPU MC of the main control board M adds (increments) 1 to the ball entry counter value. Next, in step 2410, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the general winning opening detection continuation flag, and proceeds to step 2420. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2402, in step 2412, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the input from the general winning opening ball detection device for the ball entry detection time (the time or more, the general winning opening ball detecting device inputs. If is not detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than the time (time when it is considered that the game ball has completed passing through the general winning opening ball detection device). In the case of Yes in step 2412, in step 2414, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the general winning opening detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2418, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the general winning opening long-time detection flag, and proceeds to step 2420. In addition, even if No in step 2404 and step 2412, the process proceeds to step 2420.

Next, in step 2420, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the input from the general winning opening entry ball detection device is an illegal detection time {when the general winning opening entry ball detection device detects the input for that time or longer, the general winning opening ball entry detection device is used. It is determined whether or not the time is ON for more than the time when it is considered that an illegal entry into the mouth is detected. In the case of Yes in step 2420, in step 2422, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the general winning opening long-time detection flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2500). Even if No in step 2420, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2500).

Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the ejection ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. First, in step 2502, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the emission confirmation detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2502, in step 2504, the CPUMC of the main control board M confirms the total emission when the input from the total emission confirmation sensor C90s is the input ball detection time (when the total emission confirmation sensor C90s detects the input for that time or more). It is determined whether or not the sensor C90s is ON for more than the time it is considered that the ball has entered. In the case of Yes in step 2504, in step 2506, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the emission confirmation detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2508, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds (increments) 1 to the total emission confirmation number counter, and shifts to the next process (process of step 2520).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2502, in step 2510, the CPUMC of the main control board M did not detect the input from the total emission confirmation sensor C90s for the detection end time (the total emission confirmation sensor C90s did not detect the input for that time or longer). In this case, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than the time (time when it is considered that the game ball has completed passing through the total discharge confirmation sensor C90s). In the case of Yes in step 2510, in step 2512, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the emission confirmation detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2514, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the emission confirmation long-time detection flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2520). Even if No in step 2504 or step 2510, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2520).

Next, in step 2520, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the input from the total emission confirmation sensor C90s is ON for the fraud detection time or longer. In the case of Yes in step 2520, in step 2522, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the emission confirmation long-time detection flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2600). On the other hand, even if No in step 2520, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2600).

Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the out-mouth / in-ball detection process according to the subroutine of step 2600 in FIG. First, in step 2602, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the out port detection continuation flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2602, in step 2604, the CPUMC of the main control board M detects the input from the out-port entry ball detection device D36s for the entry detection time (the time or more, the out-port entry ball detection device D36s detects the input). Then, it is determined whether or not the ball is ON for more than the time (time when it is considered that the ball has entered the out port D36 or the upper out port D36-2). In the case of Yes in step 2604, in step 2606, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the out port detection continuation flag, and in step 2608, 1 is added to the ball entry counter value, and the process proceeds to step 2620. ..

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2602, in step 2610, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the input from the out-port entry ball detection device D36s for the detection end time (the time or more, the out-port entry ball detection device D36s inputs the input. If it is not detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball is OFF for more than the time (time when it is considered that the game ball has completed passing through the out-mouth / entry-in-ball detection device D36s). In the case of Yes in step 2610, in step 2612, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the out port detection continuation flag. Next, in step 2615, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the out port long-time detection flag, and proceeds to step 2620. On the other hand, even if No in step 2604 or step 2610, the process proceeds to step 2620.

Next, in step 2620, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the input from the out-port / entry ball detection device D36s has an illegal detection time (when the out-port / entry ball detection device D36s has detected the input for that time or longer). , The time for which it is considered that an illegal entry into the out port D36 or the upper out port D36-2 has been performed) or more is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2620, in step 2622, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the out port long-time detection flag and shifts to the next process (process of step 2700). On the other hand, even if No in step 2620, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2700).

Next, FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the prize ball number determination process according to the subroutine of step 2700 in FIG. First, in step 2702, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the ball has entered the first main game start port (A10). In the case of Yes in step 2702, in step 2704, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds the number of prize balls paid out (3 in this example) related to the first main game start port A10 to the counter value of the prize ball number counter. do. Next, in step 2708, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores information (for example, information related to the number of prize balls paid out) to pay out the prize balls related to the first main game start port A10, and steps 2709. Move to -1. On the other hand, if No in step 2702, the process proceeds to step 2709-1.

Next, in step 2709-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the ball has entered the first main game start port (A10-2). In the case of Yes in step 2709-1, in step 2709-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the counter value of the prize ball counter to the number of prize balls paid out related to the first main game start port A10-2 (this example). Then, add 1). Next, in step 2709-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores information (for example, information related to the number of prize balls paid out) to pay out the prize balls related to the first main game start port A10-2. Then, the process proceeds to step 2712. On the other hand, if No in step 2709-1, the process proceeds to step 2712.

Next, in step 2712, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the second main game start flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2712, in step 2714, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds the number of prize balls paid out (1 in this example) related to the second main game start port B10 to the counter value of the prize ball counter. do. Next, in step 2718, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores information (for example, information related to the number of prize balls paid out) to pay out the prize balls related to the second main game start port B10, and steps 2720. Move to. On the other hand, if No in step 2712, the process proceeds to step 2720.

Next, in step 2720-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the ball has entered the auxiliary game electric accessory E10 (distribution ball opening C20). In the case of Yes in step 2720-1, in step 2720-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds the number of prize balls paid out (1 in this example) to the counter value of the prize ball counter. do. Next, in step 2720-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores information to pay out the prize balls related to the electric accessory (for example, information related to the number of prize balls paid out), and proceeds to step 2722. do. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2720-1, the process proceeds to step 2722.

Next, in step 2722, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first (second) grand prize opening entry flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2722, in step 2723, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the first (second) grand prize opening ball entry flag. Next, in step 2724, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the counter value of the prize ball counter to the number of prize balls paid out (15 in this example) related to the first prize ball number C10 or the second prize ball number C20. The number of prize balls paid out (5 in this example) is added. Next, in step 2728, the CPUMC of the main control board M pays out the prize balls related to the first prize-winning opening C10 (second prize-winning opening C20) (for example, information related to the number of prize balls paid out). Is temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to step 2732. On the other hand, if No in step 2722, the process proceeds to step 2732.

Next, in step 2732, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the general winning opening entry flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2732, in step 2733, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the general winning opening entry flag. Next, in step 2734, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds the number of prize balls paid out (10 in this example) related to the general winning opening to the counter value of the prize ball number counter. Next, in step 2738, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores information to pay out the prize balls related to the general winning opening (for example, information related to the number of prize balls paid out), and next processing (step 1100). Process). On the other hand, even if No in step 2732, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1100).

Next, FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. First, in step 1102, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the game ball has entered (inflow, in the case of a gate, passed) into the auxiliary game start port H10. In the case of Yes in step 1102, in step 1103, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits an auxiliary game start port entry command, which is a command relating to the fact that the ball has entered the auxiliary game start port H10, to the sub-main control unit SM. It is set in the command transmission buffer of the above (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999), and the process proceeds to the process of step 1110. Next, in step 1110, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of reserved balls is not the upper limit (for example, four). In the case of Yes in step 1110, in step 1112, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires an auxiliary game content determination random number (for example, an auxiliary game symbol winning random number). Next, in step 1114, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the hold ball in the form of being set in the RAM area of the main control board M together with the information on the number of hold, and the next process ( Step 1200 process). Even if No in step 1104 and step 1110, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1200). Here, in the present embodiment, since the auxiliary game start port H10 has the shape of a gate, the game ball that has entered the auxiliary game start port H10 (passes through the auxiliary game start port H10) continues on the game board surface. It will flow down and can enter the ball entrance (large winning opening, etc.) downstream from the auxiliary game starting port H10, while the game ball that has entered the large winning opening will flow down to the back of the game board surface. After that, it is configured not to enter other ball entrances. Even if the game ball enters the auxiliary game start port H10 (the game ball passes through the auxiliary game start port H10), the prize ball is not paid out.

Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the electric accessory drive determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1202, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the electric accessory opening flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1202, in step 1204, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the auxiliary game symbol changing flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1204, in step 1206, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a reserved ball related to the auxiliary game symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1206, in step 1216, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the game state on the auxiliary game side (flag state of the auxiliary game time reduction flag) and refers to the lottery table for determining the auxiliary game symbol. The stop symbol is determined based on the acquired game state of the auxiliary game side and the auxiliary game symbol winning random number based on the reserved ball (for example, when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on, it is higher than when it is off. The winning symbol is selected with probability) and temporarily stored in the RAM area of the CPUMC of the main control board M.

Here, the right side of the figure is an example of a lottery table for determining an auxiliary game stop symbol. As shown in the table, in this example, the stop symbol has "D0, D1", the stop symbol that becomes the hit symbol is "D1", and the stop symbol is opened due to the stop. The opening mode of the electric accessory is (1.6 seconds open → 0.2 seconds closed → 0.2 seconds) when the stopped symbol is “D1” during the non-time reduction game. Open → closed). Further, in the time shortening game, when the stopped symbol is "D1", the opening mode is (open for 0.2 seconds → closed for 1.6 seconds → open for 5.8 seconds → closed). Although the probability is almost the same, the stop symbol is likely to be a lost symbol "D0" during the non-time reduction game, and the stop symbol is likely to be a hit symbol "D1" during the time reduction game.

Next, in step 1218, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the change time of the auxiliary game symbol on the auxiliary game symbol change management timer based on the game state of the auxiliary game side (flag state of the auxiliary game time reduction flag). Set the time (for example, 1 second when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on, 1.1 seconds when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is off). Then, in step 1220, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game symbol changing flag. Next, in step 1222, the CPUMC of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the holding ball related to the auxiliary game symbol, updates the holding information recorded in the RAM area of the CPUMC of the main control board M, and assists. After starting the game symbol variation management timer, the auxiliary game symbol variation display is started on the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g.

Next, in step 1224, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the timer for managing the variation of the auxiliary game symbol, and determines whether or not the predetermined time related to the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1224, in step 1226, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol, and confirms and displays the acquired stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol on the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g. do. Then, in step 1228, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game symbol changing flag. Next, in step 1230, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is a “hit” (D1 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1230, in step 1232, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the opening mode based on the gaming state and the winning symbol on the auxiliary game side, and the opening time of the electric accessory is set to the electric accessory opening timer. Set the predetermined time related to (opening and closing time). Next, in step 1234, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the electric accessory opening flag. Then, in step 1236, the CPUMC of the main control board M releases the auxiliary game electric accessory E10, and proceeds to step 1242. Even if No in step 1202, the process proceeds to step 1242.

Next, in step 1242, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the electric accessory release timer and determines whether or not the predetermined time related to the release time of the electric accessory has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1242, in step 1244 and step 1246, the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the auxiliary game electric accessory E10, turns off the electric accessory opening flag, and next processes (step 1300). Process).

If No in step 1204, the process proceeds to step 1224, and if No in step 1206, step 1224, step 1230 and step 1242, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1250).

Further, in this flowchart, for convenience, after the stop symbol is displayed in step 1226, the process immediately proceeds to the next step, but the present invention is not limited to this. In that case, the process may be configured to move to the next process after a fixed stop display time of about 500 ms (for example, this process is performed by performing branch processing using the stop display fixed flag and timer. Achievable). In addition, there may be a plurality of auxiliary game content determination random numbers, an auxiliary game symbol winning random number for determining the success or failure of the auxiliary game, an auxiliary game symbol stop symbol random number for determining the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol, and an auxiliary game symbol. Auxiliary game symbol variation mode random numbers and the like for determining the variation time of the game may be provided.

Although not shown, in one opening operation of the auxiliary game electric accessory E10 (opening operation based on the stop of the symbol per auxiliary game), a predetermined number of game balls are provided in the auxiliary game electric accessory E10 (not shown). For example, even when 10 balls are entered, the opening operation of the auxiliary game electric accessory E10 is terminated, that is, the opening time of the auxiliary game electric accessory E10 ends, or the auxiliary game electric accessory E10 is terminated. When the predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of the game balls enter the auxiliary game electric accessory E10 during the opening period of the object E10, whichever comes first, the auxiliary game electric accessory E10 is released (opened). Period) is configured to end. In addition, the total time that the normal electric accessory is open in the non-time reduction game state (auxiliary game time reduction flag on) is 1.8 seconds, which is the time that the normal electric accessory is open in the time reduction game state. The total is 6.0 seconds, and it is configured so that the maximum opening time of one time does not exceed 6 seconds in any game state, and the maximum number of winnings during operation does not exceed approximately 10. As described above, it is predetermined for each game state (whether it is a time-reduced game state or a non-time-reduced game state).

Further, in this example, when the normal symbol (auxiliary game symbol) that triggers the operation of the ordinary electric accessory (auxiliary game electric accessory E10) is confirmed and displayed in the winning mode, it is immediately (for example, the shortest in the gaming machine). (Within 500 ms, which is shorter than the symbol fluctuation time of In addition, in order to prevent a large number of game balls from winning during the closing operation (during the operation of opening → closing) of the ordinary electric accessory (auxiliary game electric accessory E10), the ordinary electric accessory (auxiliary game) The drive source (solenoid) is selected so that the electric accessory E10) returns to the non-operating state in a short time, so that the game ball does not win more than necessary and does not differ significantly from the ball ejection design. It has become.

Next, FIG. 25 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the auxiliary game electric accessory E10 (distribution ball opening C20). Inside the auxiliary game electric accessory E10, the first non-electric accessory HD-1 is opened when the game ball enters the first open ball opening N1 (first open ball entry). The detection device N1s) and the second open ball opening N2 (second open ball entry detection device N2s) in which the second non-electric accessory HD-2 is opened when the game ball enters. It has a distribution member FB that distributes a game ball that has entered the auxiliary game electric accessory E10 into a first open entry port N1 and a second open entry port N2.

First, to explain the operation in the upper part of the figure in detail, when the distribution member FB is the first aspect, it is in a state of swinging to the right so as to block the flow path to the first open entry port N1. , The game ball that has entered the auxiliary game electric accessory E10 is configured so as to be easy to enter the second open entry port N2 and difficult to enter the first open entry port N1. Next, the operation in the lower part of the figure will be described in detail. When the distribution member FB is in the second mode, it is in a state of swinging to the left so as to block the flow path to the second open entry port N2. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the auxiliary game electric accessory E10 is configured so that it is difficult to enter the second open entry port N2 and it is easy to enter the first open entry port N1. Further, as will be described later, the distribution member FB is configured to start driving from the first opening timing when the auxiliary game electric accessory E10 is opened, and to be driven as in the "first aspect-> second aspect". ing.

Next, FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the distribution member drive control process according to the subroutine of step 1250 in FIG. First, in step 1250-1 whether the CPUMC of the main control board M has the distribution member driving flag (a flag that is turned on during the period when the distribution member is driven based on the opening of the electric accessory) turned off. Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1250-1, in step 1250-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M has reached the first opening timing of the electric accessory (from the timing when the electric accessory first opens, the distribution member. Is started) or not. In the case of Yes in step 1250-2, in step 1250-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M starts by setting the initial value (7.6 in this example) in the distribution member drive timer (decrement timer). Next, in step 1250-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the distribution member driving flag, and proceeds to step 1250-5. Even if No in step 1250-1, the process proceeds to step 1250-5. Next, in step 1250-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M has reached the timing of drive switching (timer value = 5.8) for the distribution member drive timer value (the distribution member drive timer is a decrement timer). Therefore, it is determined whether or not the distribution member drive timer value is 5.8 at the timing of 1.8 seconds from the start of driving the distribution member). In the case of Yes in step 1250-5, in step 1250-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M drives the distribution member from the first aspect to the second aspect (the initial position is the first aspect). Move to the next process. If No in step 1250-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1250-7 whether or not the distribution member drive timer value is 0. In the case of Yes in step 1250-7, in step 1250-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M drives the distribution member from the second aspect to the first aspect. Next, in step 1250-9, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the distribution member driving flag and shifts to the next process. Even if No in step 1250-2 or 1250-7, the process proceeds to the next process.

Next, the middle part of FIG. 26 is an operation diagram of the electric accessory and the distribution member. First, the distribution member FB is driven from the first mode (initial position) to the second mode at a predetermined timing (1.8 seconds from the start of driving). Here, in the non-time shortening gaming state, the electric accessory is long open during the period in which the distribution member is the first aspect (1.6 seconds, which is the first half of the opening period of the electric accessory described above. (Opening), and it becomes easier for the game ball to enter. On the other hand, in the time-reduced gaming state, the electric accessory is opened for a long time during the period in which the distribution member is the second aspect (opening for 5.8 seconds, which is the latter half of the opening period of the electric accessory described above). ), And it is configured to facilitate the entry of game balls. Further, the lower part of FIG. 26 is a table showing an opening mode of the electric accessory and a displacement mode of the distribution member. As described above, in the opening pattern of the electric accessory, when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on, the total opening time or the maximum opening time (when multiple openings are made) of the electric accessory is higher than when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is off. It is longer, and it is easier for the game ball to enter the distribution slot (auxiliary game electric accessory E10) when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on than when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is off. It has become. Further, as described above, the distribution member guides the game ball so as to enter the second open entry port N2 in the case of the first aspect, and in the case of the second aspect, the first open entry. The game ball is guided to enter the ball mouth N1. Although not shown, in the non-time reduction gaming state, the distribution member is driven in the second mode (the timer value of the distribution member drive timer is between 5.8 and 0). ), The opening start timing of the electric accessory may be newly reached. Therefore, at the same time as turning off the electric accessory opening flag in step 1246 in the electric accessory drive determination process shown in step 1200, the distribution member is set to the first aspect. It may be configured to initialize the timer value of the distribution member drive timer while returning to.

Next, FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the first non-electric accessory drive control process according to the subroutine of step 1280 of FIG. First, in step 1280-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M detects the opening / closing of the first non-electric accessory (first non-electric accessory open / closed detection attached to the opening / closing portion of the first non-electric accessory HD-1). When the sensor is in the non-detection state (off), it is determined whether or not the flag (flag to be turned on by determining that the first non-electric accessory HD-1 is open) is off. In the case of Yes in step 1280-1, in step 1280-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the game ball has entered the first open entry port N1. In the case of Yes in step 1280-2, in step 1280-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the flag during opening of the first non-electric accessory. Further, in the case of No in step 1280-1, in step 1280-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M is the first main game start port when the first non-electric accessory open / close detection sensor is turned from off to on. Whether or not a predetermined number (the number of balls that the first non-electric accessory HD-1 is physically closed due to the weight of the game ball, which is 2 in this example) has entered (A10-2). Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1280-5, in step 1280-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M does not satisfy the error generation condition (in this example, when the first non-electric accessory is closed (first non-motor). When the electric accessory open / close detection sensor is changed from off to on), only one ball has entered the first main game start port (A10-2), or four balls have entered. It is determined whether or not a winning operation or an opening / closing operation is determined to have been performed (when an event is observed multiple times, etc.). In the case of Yes in step 1280-6, in step 1280-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the flag during opening of the first non-electric accessory, and proceeds to the next process. Even if No in step 1280-5 or step 1280-2, the process proceeds to the next process. If No in step 1280-6, an error is notified and error processing is executed in step 1280-9. (As an error recovery condition, for example, the elapse of an abnormality notification period of a predetermined time and the power supply It may be turned off → on, RAM clear is executed, etc.), and the process proceeds to step 1280-8.

Next, FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the second non-electric accessory drive control process according to the subroutine of step 1290 of FIG. First, in step 1290-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M detects opening / closing of the second non-electric accessory attached to the opening / closing portion of the second non-electric accessory HD-2. When the sensor is in the non-detection state (off), it is determined whether or not the flag (flag to be turned on by determining that the second non-electric accessory HD-2 is open) is off. In the case of Yes in step 1290-1, in step 1290-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the ball has entered the second open ball entry port N2. In the case of Yes in step 1290-2, in step 1290-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the flag of opening the second non-electric accessory. Further, in the case of No in step 1290-1, in step 1290-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M is the second main game start port when the second non-electric accessory open / close detection sensor is turned from off to on. It is determined whether or not a predetermined number (the number of balls that the second non-electric accessory HD-2 is physically closed due to the weight of the game ball, which is 2 in this example) has entered B10. .. In the case of Yes in step 1290-5, in step 1290-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M does not satisfy the error generation condition (in this example, when the second non-electric accessory is closed (second non). Irregular winning operation such as when only one ball is entered or four balls are entered into the second main game start port B10 when the electric accessory open / close detection sensor is changed from off to on). It is determined whether or not the event determined to have been opened / closed is observed multiple times). In the case of Yes in step 1290-6, in step 1290-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the flag during opening of the second non-electric accessory, and proceeds to the next process. Even if No in step 1290-5 or step 1290-2, the process proceeds to the next process. If No in step 1290-6, in step 1290-9, an error is notified and error processing is executed. (As an error recovery condition, for example, the elapse of an abnormality notification period of a predetermined time and the power supply It may be turned off → on, RAM clear is executed, etc.), and the process proceeds to step 1290-8.

Next, FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. First, in step 1302, the CPUMC of the main control board M is from the first main game start opening ball entry detection device A11s (first main game start opening entry ball detection device A11s-2) to the first main game start opening entry ball information. Is received or not. In the case of Yes in step 1302, in step 1304, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of reserved balls for the main game (particularly the first main game side) is not the upper limit (for example, four). In the case of Yes in step 1304, in step 1306, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the first main game content determination random number. In this embodiment, as the first main game content determination random number, a winning / failing lottery random number for determining the winning / failing, a symbol lottery random number for determining the symbol at the time of winning, and a fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol are determined. Three random numbers of the variation mode lottery random number for the purpose are acquired. By the way, these three random numbers are generated from random number generation means having different update cycles and random number ranges, and are acquired in series at this timing. Next, in step 1308, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores (holds) the acquired first main game content determination random number. Next, in step 1310, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game execution flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1310, in step 1314, the CPUMC of the main control board M predetermines the win / fail result and the stop symbol related to the stored hold based on the hold information (win / fail lottery random number and symbol determination random number). Next, in step 1316, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the command related to the new hold success / failure result and the pre-determination result of the stop symbol information in the command transmission buffer for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM. (It is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1318.

Next, in step 1318, the CPUMC of the main control board M predetermines the variable mode group related to the stored hold based on the hold information (random number for determining the variable mode) (for the variable mode group, the main game table). 3), the process proceeds to step 1320. In this embodiment, one variation mode group is configured to include a plurality of types of variation modes (variation time). Even if No in step 1310 or 1312, the process proceeds to step 1320. Next, in step 1320, the CPUMC of the main control board M issues a command related to a new hold generation (a command related to the hold generation generation of the first main game content determination random number, a command related to the variation mode group command, etc.) to the sub-main control unit. It is set in the command transmission buffer for transmission to the SM (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1322. When the symbol information is transmitted to the sub-control board S side as in the present embodiment, an effect suggesting a big hit may be executed as an effect to be executed on the sub-control board S side, and such a configuration may be performed. In this case, it is desirable to have a configuration in which the stop symbol of the main game symbol that becomes the big hit can be notified to the player (the stop symbol is notified only when the stop symbol of the main game symbol becomes a big hit). Further, even if No in step 1302 or 1304, the process proceeds to step 1322. Although the first main game content determination random number is temporarily stored in step 1308, if the processing related to the first main game content determination random number is described in detail, (1) the first main game start port A10 (A10-2). The first main game content determination random number is acquired and the random number is stored in the register. (2) The first main game content determination random number stored in the register is stored in the RAM of the main control board M, and the fluctuation of the main game symbol starts based on the first main game content determination random number stored in the register. Execute a look-ahead lottery in front. (3) At the start of fluctuation of the main game symbol, the first main game content determination random number stored in the RAM of the main control board M is stored in the register, and based on the first main game content determination random number stored in the register. The winning / failing determination is executed (the winning / failing determination may be executed based on the first main game content determination random number stored in the RAM of the main control board M). If the second main game side is also configured to be able to execute the look-ahead lottery, the same process may be executed for the second main game content determination random number.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the variation mode group is determined when the main game content determination random number (first main game content determination random number or second main game content determination random number) is acquired (or when hold occurs). ing.

It should be noted that the information to be transmitted to the sub-control board S side may be configured to transmit the main game content determination random number information and the variation mode group information to the sub-control board S side at the timing when the hold occurs. Not limited to this, information related to the stopped symbol of the main game symbol, information related to the profit mode of the main game symbol that is a big hit (number of special game rounds related to the main game symbol scheduled to be stopped, etc.), immediately after the pending prize Information on the number of holdings (the number of holdings on the first main game side or the winning side of the second main game side, or the number of holdings on both the first main game side and the second main game side), etc. May be configured to be able to transmit.

Next, in step 1322, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the second main game start opening ball entry information has been received from the second main game start opening ball entry detection device B11s. In the case of Yes in step 1322, in step 1324, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of reserved balls for the main game (particularly the second main game side) is not the upper limit (for example, four). In the case of Yes in step 1324, in step 1326, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the second main game content determination random number. In this embodiment, as the second main game content determination random number, three random numbers of a win / fail lottery random number, a symbol lottery random number, and a variation mode lottery random number are acquired as in the case of the first main game symbol determination means. By the way, the acquisition range of each random number of the first main game content determination random number and the acquisition range of each random number of the second main game content determination random number (for example, the winning / failing lottery random number for the first main game and the winning / failing lottery random number for the second main game). Acquisition range) is set to the same. Next, in step 1328, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores (holds) the acquired second main game content determination random number. Next, in step 1330, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game execution flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1330, in step 1334, the CPUMC of the main control board M predetermines the win / fail result and the stop symbol related to the stored hold based on the hold information (win / fail lottery random number and symbol determination random number). Next, in step 1336, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the command related to the new hold success / failure result and the pre-determination result of the stop symbol information in the command transmission buffer for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM. (It is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1338.

If No in step 1330, the process proceeds to step 1340.

Next, in step 1338, the CPUMC of the main control board M predetermines the variable mode group related to the stored hold based on the hold information (random number for determining the variable mode) (for the variable mode group, the main game table). 3), the process proceeds to step 1340. Next, in step 1340, the CPUMC of the main control board M issues a new hold generation command (a second main game content determination random number hold generation command, a command related to a variation mode group command, etc.) to the sub-main control unit. It is set in the command transmission buffer for transmission to the SM (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1400). Further, in the case of No in step 1322 or step 1324, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1400).

In the present embodiment, as a result of the preliminary determination, the command related to the variation mode group is transmitted on the second main game side, but the command related to the variation mode group is transmitted on the second main game side. It may be configured not to transmit. That is, as a result of the pre-determination, only the command related to the pre-determination result of the hit / fail result and the stop symbol information may be transmitted.

In steps 1308 and 1328, the first main game content determination random number is stored and the second main game content determination random number is stored, but the main game content determination random number is stored in the RAM storage area of the main control board. When storing, a dedicated storage area is secured, and only the information related to the "main game content determination random number" is stored in the byte that stores the information related to the main game content determination random number (various timers). It is preferable to configure it so that other information such as values is not stored (when operating another data stored in the same 1 byte, the information related to the main game content determination random number is rewritten due to noise or the like. To prevent it from getting stuck). In addition, regarding the winning / failing lottery random number, the change in the gaming state (the already recorded game state related to the hold) between the acquisition of the winning / failing lottery random number and the execution of the winning / failing lottery related to the winning / failing lottery random number. Not only the change but also the game state may change due to the newly generated hold, so the game state at the time of executing the win / fail lottery related to the lottery random number is unpredictable). Is configured to store the lottery random number until the execution of. In the present embodiment, the command to the sub-main control unit SM related to the hold information is a hold related to the first main game or a hold related to the second main game regardless of the game state. Regardless of this, the command is configured to be able to be transmitted, but the command to the sub-main control unit SM related to the hold information is transmitted only when the hold occurs related to the first main game in the non-time reduction game state. On the other hand, even in the time-reduced game state, as shown in the game state transition diagram described later, the hold digestion related to the first main game is the main, so that the command can be transmitted only when the hold occurs related to the first main game. May be good. In the present embodiment, when the random number for determining the content of the first main game is stored, the special game is not executed, the game is in a non-time shortened game state, and the symbol related to the second main game is changed. When the variable display that is a big hit is not executed as the display, the information regarding the success / failure result, the stop symbol, and the variable mode group related to the new hold is transmitted to the sub-control board S side.

Next, FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) related to the subroutine of the main game symbol display process in FIG. This figure is configured to be able to execute a so-called parallel lottery in which the main game symbols of both the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol are drawn in parallel at the same time. Since this processing is substantially the same for the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the processing on the second main game symbol side will be described. Write in parentheses. First, in step 1403, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Here, the fluctuation start condition is that the main game symbol that is not in the special game (or the condition device is operating), the main game symbol that is the target of control is not in the change of the main game symbol, and the main game symbol that is the target of control is The condition is that there is a hold. Although not shown in this example, when a variable fixed time (time for stopping and displaying the confirmed display symbol after the final display of the main game symbol) is provided, the variable start condition of the next fluctuation is set during the variable fixed time. It may be configured not to satisfy.

In the case of Yes in step 1403, in step 1405 and step 1406, the CPUMC of the main control board M is temporarily stored, and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) related to the current symbol variation is temporarily stored. Is read, deleted from the pending information, and the remaining temporarily stored information is shifted (pending digest processing). Next, in step 1410-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the first main game win / loss lottery table (second main game win / loss lottery table) corresponding to each game state, and the content of the first main game. The main game symbol winning / failing lottery is executed based on the determined random number (second main game content determined random number) (particularly, the winning lottery random number).

Here, FIG. 31 (main game table 1) is an example of a first main game winning / failing lottery table (second main game winning / failing lottery table). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability in the probability-variable gaming state is configured to be higher (= probability variation) than the jackpot winning probability in the non-probability-variable gaming state. .. The winning probability is just an example, and is not limited to this.

Next, in step 1410-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the first main game symbol determination lottery table (second main game symbol determination lottery table), and refers to the main game symbol winning / failing result and the first. A stop symbol related to the main game symbol is determined based on the main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the symbol lottery random number), and these are temporarily stored.

Here, FIG. 32 (main game table 2) is an example of the first main game symbol determination lottery table (second main game symbol determination lottery table). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is won, from among a plurality of main game symbol candidates (in this example, "α1, α2, α3" and "β1, β2, β3"). One main game symbol is configured to be determined as a jackpot symbol. The number of rounds of the special game determined with reference to the main game symbol is all 10R. It should be noted that the random value and the type of the stop symbol are also examples, and are not limited to this. {For example, the lost symbol is not limited to one type of symbol, and a plurality of types of symbols are provided. May}

Next, in step 1410-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the first main game variation mode determination lottery table (second main game variation mode determination lottery table) corresponding to each game state, and is the main. The variation mode of the main game symbol is determined based on the game symbol winning / failing lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the variation mode lottery random number), and these are determined by the main control board M. Temporarily store in the RAM area.

Here, the main game table 3 shown in FIGS. 33 to 35 is an example of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table (second main game variation mode determination lottery table). As shown in this figure, in the present embodiment, the variation mode (variation time) of the main game symbol with respect to a certain random number value can be determined based on the winning / failing lottery result of the main game symbol and the main game time reduction flag state. Has been done. For example, when the winning / failing lottery result of the main game symbol is a hit for a certain random number value, it is easy to determine the fluctuation mode in which the fluctuation time is relatively long, and the main game time reduction flag is on (time reduction game). The state) is configured so that it is easy to determine a variation mode in which the variation time is relatively short. It should be noted that this example is merely an example, and is not limited to the type of variation mode (variation time), selection rate, or the like. In addition, in FIGS. 33 to 35, the variation mode group is provided even in the situation where the information related to the variation mode group is not transmitted to the sub control board S side (gaming state, etc.), but the variation mode group is not limited to this, and is subordinate. The variation mode group may be provided only in the situation of transmitting to the control board S side. Also, regarding the main game time reduction flag, which of the main game probability change flag (flag that operates during the high probability state) and the auxiliary game time reduction flag (flag that operates during the advantageous game state on the auxiliary game side) operates at the same time. Depending on the situation, the type of the main game for shortening the fluctuation time may be changed, or one of the plurality of main game time reduction flags may be selectively activated. For example, when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is activated, the lottery table for determining the first main game variation mode is set so that the variation mode for the short time game can be easily determined, and the main game probability variation flag is turned on ( When (during high-probability game) and the auxiliary game time reduction flag is off, it is easy to determine a variation mode for a short time for the second main game variation mode determination lottery table.

Next, in step 1412, the CPUMC of the main control board M uses the temporarily stored commands related to the main game symbol (stop symbol information, stop symbol attribute information, variation mode information, etc.) and commands related to the current game state (stop symbol information, stop symbol attribute information, variation mode information, etc.). The symbol variation display start instruction command) is set in the command transmission buffer for transmission to the sub-main control unit SM side (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, in step 1414, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined time related to the fluctuation time of the main game symbol in the first and second main game symbol fluctuation management timers. Next, in step 1416, the CPUMC of the main control board M is the first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). On B21g), the variation display of the main game symbol is started according to the variation mode temporarily stored. Next, in step 1418, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the changing flag and proceeds to step 1419-1.

Next, in step 1419-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on (= high base).

In the case of Yes in step 1419-1, in step 1419-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M has a fluctuation in which the current fluctuation becomes a big hit in the first main game symbol (a fluctuation in which the fluctuation becomes a big hit in the second main game symbol). ).

In the case of Yes in step 1419-2, in step 1419-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game time reduction flag (that is, low base), and proceeds to the process of step 1422.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1419-1 and step 1419-2, the process proceeds to step 1422.

On the other hand, if No in step 1403, in step 1420, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the changing flag is on. If Yes in step 1420, the process proceeds to step 1422, and if No in step 1420, the process proceeds to the next process.

Next, in step 1422, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the predetermined time related to the fluctuation time of the main game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1422, in step 1422, the CPUMC of the main control board M is for command transmission for transmitting information (symbol confirmation display instruction command) to the effect that the symbol variation is completed to the sub-main control unit SM side. It is set in the buffer (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, in step 1424, the CPUMC of the main control board M is the first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). B21g) Stops the variable display of the main game symbol, and controls the display of the temporarily stored stop symbol as a fixed stop symbol. Next, in step 1426, a command (command for transmitting to the sub side) related to the information that the symbol is stopped and displayed is set. Next, in step 1428, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the changing flag.

Next, in step 1430, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1430, in step 1432, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the condition device operation flag and proceeds to step 3350.

On the other hand, if No in step 1430, in step 1434, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol is a small hit symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1434, in step 1436, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the small hit flag and proceeds to step 1500. If No in step 1434, the process proceeds to step 3350.

Next, in step 3350, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the other main game fluctuation control process described later.

Next, in step 1500, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the specific game end determination process described later, and shifts to the next process. Even if No in step 1420, the process proceeds to the next process.

If No is set in step 1419-2, the specific game end determination process of step 1500 may be executed.

With this configuration, for example, in the case of ST100 times, when the ST100 variation (loss) is changing in one main game symbol, the 101st variation starts to change in the other main game symbol. Can be drawn with a low probability.

Next, FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the other main game variation control process according to the subroutine of step 3350 in FIG. This process is executed when the stopped main game symbol is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol. First, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means, and determines whether or not the stopped main game symbol is the first main game symbol. In the case of Yes in step 3352, in step 3354, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means, and determines whether or not the second main game symbol is changing. do. In the case of Yes in step 3354, in step 3356, the CPUMC of the main control board M forcibly stops the changing second main game symbol due to loss, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1500). On the other hand, if No in step 3352, in step 3358, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means, and is the first main game symbol changing? Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 3358, in step 3359-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol is a small hit symbol. In the case of Yes in step 3359-1, in step 3360, the CPUMC of the main control board M pauses the first main game symbol in the change and shifts to the next process (process of step 1500). On the other hand, if No in step 3359-1 (= when the stop symbol is a big hit symbol), the first main game symbol in the change is forcibly stopped by losing, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500). .. Even if No in step 3354 or step 3358, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500). It should be noted that the fluctuation of the temporarily stopped first main game symbol is configured to resume the fluctuation after the end of the small hit related to the stopped second main game symbol, and the first main game symbol whose fluctuation has resumed is It is configured to stop based on the winning / failing lottery result and the symbol lottery result drawn before the start of the fluctuation. With this configuration, if the first main game jackpot symbol is stopped in the non-time shortened game state (low base state) and the second main game symbol is changed, the second main game symbol in the change is changed. 2 The fluctuation time of the main game symbol is long, and the jackpot related to the second main game symbol should not be executed. Therefore, the second main game symbol during the fluctuation is forcibly stopped by losing, and the non-time is shortened. If the first main game symbol is changed when the second main game small hit symbol is stopped in the game state, the first main game symbol during the change is temporarily stopped.

Next, FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination process according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. First, in step 1502, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the probability variation number counter and determines whether or not the counter value is larger than 0. In the case of Yes in step 1502, in step 1504, the CPU MC of the main control board M decrements the counter value of the probability variation counter. For example, when the probability change is substantially continued until the next big hit, 10000 times is set in the probability change number counter, and 1 subtraction (decrement) is performed for each change. In the case of Yes in step 1504, in step 1506, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the probability variation number counter and determines whether or not the counter value is 0. In the case of Yes in step 1506, in step 1508, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game probability change flag and proceeds to step 1510. Even if No in step 1502 or step 1506, the process proceeds to step 1510.

Next, in step 1510, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the time reduction counter and determines whether or not the counter value is larger than 0. In the case of Yes in step 1510, in step 1512, the CPU MC of the main control board M decrements the counter value of the time reduction counter. Next, in step 1514, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the time reduction counter and determines whether or not the counter value is 0. In the case of Yes in step 1514, in step 1516, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game time reduction flag. Next, in step 1518, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game time reduction flag and shifts to the next process. In addition, even if No in step 1510 or step 1514, the process proceeds to the next process. As described above, the main game time reduction flag may be divided into a plurality of types based on the combination of on or off of the two flags, the main game probability change flag and the auxiliary game time reduction flag, or the target main game symbol may be changed. In this case, the process shown in step 1516 is not performed, and after the end of step 1518 (or when No in step 1510 or No in step 1514), the main game time is shortened according to the result of checking both flags. It may be configured to change the type of the flag or change the main game symbol targeted by the main game time reduction flag.

Next, FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process according to the subroutine of step 1700 in FIG. First, in step 1701, the CPUMC of the main control board M is a discharge waiting flag {a flag that is turned on in step 1722 described later, that is, a planned small hit game (particularly, the planned second large). Whether or not the flag that is turned on during the discharge waiting period (discharge waiting time) of the game balls remaining in the second major winning opening C20 after the execution of the winning opening C20 opening pattern) is turned off. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1701, in step 1702, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the small hit flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1702, in step 1704, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the small hit flag. Next, in step 1705, the CPUMC of the main control board M changes the opening pattern of the second winning opening C20 of the round (in this example, for example, in all the small hit symbols, "1.8 seconds open → closed". (Depending on the firing interval of the game ball, the upstream winning opening, etc., in order to increase the expected value of the ball during the small hit, it may be opened or closed multiple times with a short opening time and closing time. It is preferable to configure the game so that the total opening time is within 1.8 seconds), and if the game ball is continuously fired toward the second prize opening C20, the second prize opening C20 will be used. (The game ball is configured to enter multiple balls) is set. The opening mode of the large winning opening (second large winning opening C20) at the time of executing a small hit can be arbitrarily set. For example, the total opening time of the second large winning opening C20 at the time of executing one small hit. May be appropriately configured so as to be less than or equal to a predetermined time (for example, 1.8 seconds or less). Next, in step 1706, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the small hit execution flag. Next, in step 1707, the CPUMC of the main control board M launches a small hit execution start command (a command indicating that the small hit game has started, and the player launches a game ball toward the second large winning opening C20. Is set in the command transmission buffer for transmission to the sub-main control unit SM (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, in step 1708, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the second special winning opening C20 and starts the timer for the small hit game (the timer value is counted down). Next, in step 1709, the CPUMC of the main control board M starts the discharge standby timer (increment timer) and shifts to step 1712. The discharge standby timer is configured to measure the elapsed time from the start of the small hit game so that the discharge standby time ends after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the small hit {Of course, the measurement of the discharge standby time. The method is not limited to this, and for example, the measurement may be started after the execution of the scheduled small hit game (particularly, the scheduled opening pattern of the second big winning opening C20) is completed}.

On the other hand, if No in step 1702, in step 1710, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the small hit execution flag is on. If Yes in step 1710, the process proceeds to step 1712.

Next, in step 1712, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a winning (winning) of the game ball in the second large winning opening C20. In the case of Yes in step 1712, in step 1714, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there are a predetermined number (for example, 3) of winning balls in the second large winning opening C20. If Yes in step 1714, the process proceeds to step 1718. On the other hand, if No in step 1712 or 1714, in step 1716, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the predetermined time related to the opening of the large winning opening has elapsed with reference to the timer for the small hit game. .. If Yes in step 1716, the process proceeds to step 1718.

Next, in step 1718, the CPUMC of the main control board M stops driving the second special winning opening electric accessory C21d and closes the second special winning opening C20. Next, in step 1722, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the discharge waiting flag (the discharge standby time starts from the main processing execution timing), and proceeds to step 1724. Even if No in step 1701, the process proceeds to step 1724.

Next, in step 1724, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value has reached the end value of the discharge standby time. In the case of Yes in step 1724, in step 1725, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the discharge standby timer to zero. Next, in step 1726, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the discharge waiting flag. Next, in step 1728, the CPUMC of the main control board M stops and resets the small hit game timer. Next, in step 1730, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the small hit execution flag and proceeds to the next process. In addition, even if No in step 1710, step 1716 or step 1724, the process proceeds to the next process.

Here, in this example, the maximum number of winnings set as a program in one small hit is three, and the maximum opening time of the large winning opening in one small hit is 1.8 seconds or less (more concretely). Specifically, as an opening mode of the large winning opening when executing a small hit once, a series of opening / closing operations of "1.8 seconds open → close") is set, and one of the closing conditions is achieved. In some cases it is controlled to close the big prize opening. Here, in order to suppress excessive winning and minimize the deviation from the payout design value, it is desirable to control the closing immediately after the closing condition is achieved. On the other hand, even if such processing is performed, the winning ball may enter the large winning opening immediately after the closing condition is achieved, or the winning ball remains in front of the count sensor (the counting sensor detects the winning ball after the closing condition is achieved). It is also possible. Therefore, regardless of whether the maximum number of winnings is exceeded after the lapse of the maximum opening time, the winnings are treated as valid winnings only under predetermined conditions (within a predetermined period after closing). It is desirable to do.

Next, FIG. 39 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. First, in step 1602, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game transition permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1602, in step 1604 and step 1606, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the special game transition permission flag and turns on the special game execution flag. Next, in step 1607, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets an initial value (1 in this example) in the round number counter (not shown). Next, in step 1608, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the information (special game start display instruction command) to the effect that the special game is started in the command transmission buffer for transmitting the information to the sub-main control unit side (the command transmission buffer). It is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1612.

On the other hand, if No in step 1602, in step 1610, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game execution flag is on. Then, in the case of Yes in step 1610, the process proceeds to step 1612. If No in step 1610, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the permission for the special game has not been granted, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1601).

Next, in step 1612, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the round continuation flag is off, in other words, whether or not it is just before the start of each round. In the case of Yes in step 1612, that is, immediately before the start of each round, first, in step 1614, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets an open pattern (for example, an open pattern that keeps opening, a pattern that opens and closes). To set. Next, in step 1616, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the winning ball counter to zero. Next, in step 1618, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the round continuation flag. Next, in step 1620, the CPUMC of the main control board M drives the first special winning opening electric accessory C11d (or the second large winning opening electric accessory C21d) to drive the first large winning opening C10 (or the second). Open the big winning opening C20), set the special game timer (especially the opening time timer) for a predetermined time (for example, the first big winning opening: 30 seconds, the second big winning opening: 1.8 seconds) and start. , Step 1622. On the other hand, if No in step 1612, that is, if the first prize opening C10 (or the second prize opening C20) is open, the process proceeds to step 1622 without performing the processes of steps 1614 to 1620.

Next, in step 1622, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits a game state command (for example, the current number of rounds, the number of winning games balls, etc.) related to the current special game to the sub-main control unit SM side. It is set in the command transmission buffer for command transmission (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, in step 1624, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the counter value of the winning ball counter, and in the round, a predetermined number (for example, the first prize opening C10) is inserted into the first winning opening C10 (or the second winning opening C20). It is determined whether or not there is a winning ball (large winning opening: 10 balls, second large winning opening: 3). If Yes in step 1624, the process proceeds to step 1628. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1624, in step 1626, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the special game timer (particularly the opening time timer) for a predetermined time related to the opening of the big winning opening (for example, the first big winning). It is determined whether or not the mouth: 30 seconds, the second big winning mouth: 1.8 seconds) has passed. In the case of Yes in step 1626, the process proceeds to step 1628. If No in step 1626, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1601).

Next, in step 1628, the CPUMC of the main control board M stops driving the first large winning opening electric accessory C11d (or the second large winning opening electric accessory C21d) and stops driving the first large winning opening C10 (or). Close the 2nd prize opening C20). Next, in step 1630, the CPUMC of the main control board M resets the special gaming timer (particularly the open time timer). Next, in step 1632, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the round continuation flag. Next, in step 1633, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the counter value of the round number counter (not shown). Next, in step 1634, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the final round has ended (for example, the counter value of the round number counter (not shown) in the special game-related information temporary storage means determines the maximum number of rounds. Whether or not it has been exceeded) is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1634, in step 1636, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the special game execution flag. Next, in step 1638, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the information to the effect that the special game is ended (special game end display instruction command) in the command transmission buffer for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM side. (It is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process in step 1999). Then, in step 1650, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the game state determination process after the end of the special game, which will be described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1601). Even if No in step 1634, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1601).

Next, FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game, which relates to the subroutine of step 1650 in FIG. 39. First, in step 1651, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol is a symbol that is a probability fluctuation game. In the case of Yes in step 1651, in step 1652, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined number of times (10000 times in this example) in the probability variation number counter. Next, in step 1654, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability change flag. On the other hand, if No in step 1651, the process proceeds to step 1655.

Next, in step 1655, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol is a symbol for a time-saving game (high base). In the case of Yes in step 1655, in step 1656, the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (30, 60, 10,000 times, etc. in this example) in the time reduction number counter. Next, in step 1658, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time reduction flag. Next, in step 1660, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game time reduction flag and shifts to the next process (process of step 1601). As described above, in order to make the main game time reduction flag different depending on the combination of other flags (main game probability change flag, auxiliary game time reduction flag), or to switch the target main game according to the game state. It may be configured to switch the content of the data set in the main game time reduction flag according to the type of hit. For example, the 1-byte data configured as the main game time reduction flag is configured to be provided with a bit that is turned on when the main game probability variation flag is on and a bit that is turned on when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on. Depending on whether the two bits are "0" or "1", the control content of the time-saving gaming state (auxiliary gaming state) may be configured to be different.

Next, FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the special game operating condition determination process according to the subroutine of step 1550 in FIG. First, in step 1552, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device operation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1552, in step 1554, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the specific game flag (main game probability change flag / main game time saving flag). Next, in step 1556, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the value of the probability variation counter. Next, in step 1558, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the value of the time reduction counter. Next, in step 1564, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the special game transition permission flag. Next, in step 1566, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the condition device operation flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1550-1). Even if No in step 1552, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1550-1).

Next, FIG. 42 is a flowchart of fraud detection information management processing according to the subroutine of step 1900 in FIG. First, in step 1902, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the illegal radio wave sensor and determines whether or not the input from the illegal radio wave sensor is ON continuously a predetermined number of times (for example, the process is a timer interrupt process). It is a process executed in the above, and the purpose is to eliminate the influence of noise by determining whether or not the interrupts are turned on continuously in a predetermined number of interrupts. In the case of "consecutively a predetermined number of times", it has the same meaning). In the case of Yes in step 1902, in step 1904, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that an illegal radio wave has been detected, turns on the illegal radio wave detection flag, and proceeds to step 1912. On the other hand, if No in step 1902, in step 1906, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the illegal radio wave sensor and determines whether or not the input from the illegal radio wave sensor is continuously turned off a predetermined number of times. In the case of Yes in step 1906, in step 1908, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the detection of the illegal radio wave is completed, turns off the illegal radio wave detection flag, and proceeds to step 1912. Even if No in step 1906, the process proceeds to step 1912.

Next, in step 1912, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the illegal magnetic sensor and determines whether or not the input from the illegal magnetic sensor is ON continuously a predetermined number of times. In the case of Yes in step 1912, in step 1914, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the illegal magnetism has been detected, turns on the illegal magnetism detection flag, and proceeds to step 1922. On the other hand, if No in step 1912, in step 1916, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the illegal magnetic sensor and determines whether or not the input from the illegal magnetic sensor is continuously turned off a predetermined number of times. In the case of Yes in step 1916, in step 1918, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the detection of the illegal magnetism is completed, turns off the illegal magnetism detection flag, and proceeds to step 1922. Even if No in step 1916, the process proceeds to step 1922.

Next, in step 1922, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the door opening sensor and determines whether or not the input from the door opening sensor is continuously ON a predetermined number of times. In the case of Yes in step 1922, in step 1924, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the door unit D18 has been opened, turns on the door opening flag, and proceeds to step 1932. On the other hand, if No in step 1922, in step 1926, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the door opening sensor and determines whether or not the input from the door opening sensor is continuously turned off a predetermined number of times. In the case of Yes in step 1926, in step 1928, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the door unit D18 has been opened, turns off the door opening flag, and proceeds to step 1932. Even if No in step 1926, the process proceeds to step 1932.

Next, in step 1932, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the frame opening sensor and determines whether or not the input from the frame opening sensor is continuously ON a predetermined number of times. In the case of Yes in step 1932, in step 1934, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the gaming machine frame D has been opened, turns on the frame opening flag, and proceeds to step 1934. On the other hand, if No in step 1932, in step 1936, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the frame opening sensor and determines whether or not the input from the frame opening sensor is continuously turned off a predetermined number of times. In the case of Yes in step 1936, in step 1938, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the gaming machine frame D has been opened, turns off the frame opening flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1950). .. Even if No in step 1936, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1950).

Next, FIG. 43 is a flowchart of the error management process according to the subroutine of step 1950 in FIG. First, in step 1952, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the error generation condition is satisfied. In the case of Yes in step 1952, in step 1954, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits a command (command to the sub control board S side) relating to the fact that an error has occurred and the error type information (control command in step 1999). It is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the transmission process). Next, in step 1956, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the error cancellation condition is satisfied. In the case of Yes in step 1956, in step 1958, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits a command (command to the sub control board S side) related to the information that the error has been canceled (control command transmission process in step 1999). Is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1550-7). Even if No in step 1952 or step 1956, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1550-7).

Next, FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the emission control signal output process according to the subroutine of step 1550-7 in FIG. First, in step 1550-7-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M indicates a payout control board (sometimes referred to as a prize ball payout control board KH), a communication state (BIT0), and a disconnection short-circuit power supply error (BIT1). Get the error flag. BIT0 indicating the communication state indicates normal if it is "0000000000B", and indicates an abnormality if it is "00000001B". In BIT1 indicating a disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormality, "0000000000B" indicates normality, and "00000010B" indicates an abnormality. Next, in step 1550-7-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M calculates the logical product of the error flag acquired in step 1550-7-1 and the determination data (“00000011B”). Next, in step 1550-7-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the emission permission signal bit data. For example, BIT5 of the output port indicates a launch permission signal, and if it is "0000000000B", it indicates an error (abnormality), and if it is "001000000B", it indicates normality. Next, in step 1550-7-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M outputs to the output port and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1550-8). Here, the output port is, for example, BIT0 is digit 1 bit data, BIT1 is digit 2 bit data, BIT2 is digit 3 bit data, BIT3 is digit 4 bit data, BIT4 is digit 5 bit data, and BIT5 is emission permission signal bit data. , BIT6 is configured as a production strobe bit data, and BIT7 is configured as a security bit.

Next, FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the external signal output process according to the subroutine of step 3500 in FIG. First, in step 3502, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the game state temporary storage means and confirms the state of the game machine. Next, in step 3504, the CPUMC of the main control board M outputs a signal indicating the state of the gaming machine to the hall computer HC via the external relay terminal board G based on the confirmed state of the gaming machine, and then next (Processing of step 1550-11).

(External relay terminal board)
Here, the signal output via the external relay terminal board G according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the lower part of the figure (image diagram of the signal output). The external relay terminal board G has a plurality of external connection terminals as output terminals to which various cable connectors are connected {for example, information on prize ball payout, information on winning or symbol stop, current gaming state (normal state, specific state). Game state information output terminal for outputting information related to game status, special game status, etc., error information output for outputting various error information detected by the open detection sensor when the door is open, etc. Terminals, etc.} are provided. As will be described later, the plurality of output terminals are connected to the hall computer HC by a cable harness so that information can be output from the plurality of output terminals to the hall computer HC. Here, in the present embodiment, one output terminal is assigned as an output terminal for payout-related information which is information output from the prize ball payout control board KH and is a plurality of types of information. The output terminals other than the one output terminal are output terminals for signals output from the main control board M. For example, there are a plurality of jackpot output terminals that output a signal during a jackpot at the time of a jackpot (there are a plurality of terminals depending on the type of jackpot). ), The door open output terminal that outputs a signal while the glass door D18 is open, the start port output terminal that outputs a signal when a prize is won in the start port, and the prize ball tank KT are short of balls. Game-related information that is important information for the game hall operator, such as an output terminal when the ball runs out that outputs a signal while the game is running, and an output terminal for the number of times the special symbol is confirmed that outputs a signal when the special symbol confirmation is stopped. It is an output terminal. That is, by setting the output terminal of the payout-related information as one output terminal, it is possible to prevent the output terminal of these important game-related information from being exhausted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are configured to transmit game-related information and payout-related information to the external relay terminal board G in the form of one-way serial transmission. There is. That is, no transmission line is provided from the external relay terminal board G to the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH (the same applies to information transmission from the external relay terminal board G to the hall computer HC).

Here, to explain the outline of the information transmission method of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, first, between the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH and the external relay terminal board G, and the external relay terminal board. The G and the hall computer HC are connected by a cable harness. On the other hand, as shown in this example, since the external relay terminal board G is composed of a communication relay (so-called relay), the main control board M, the prize ball payout control board KH, and the hall computer HC are always conductive. Not that. That is, the electrical signal (a binary logic signal whose voltage is Hi level / Low level) input from the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH to the input terminal of the external relay terminal board G is the relay. After being once replaced with a physical signal (a signal of binary logic whose switch state is on / off) by the unit, it is output from the output terminal of the external relay terminal board G to the hall computer HC. More specifically, the external relay terminal board G has a plurality of relay coils G1 and contact portions G2 corresponding to the respective input / output terminals. Then, when the relay coil G1 is excited based on the pulse signal input to the input terminal, a magnetic force is generated, and the contact portion G2 is closed by the generated magnetic force, so that the output terminal and the hall computer HC are electrically connected. Further, when the relay coil G1 is degaussed, the contact portion G2 returns to the open state, so that the output terminal and the hall computer HC do not conduct with each other. Therefore, on the hall computer HC side, by detecting the conduction period, it is possible to obtain a pulse signal substantially the same as the pulse signal input to the input terminal of the external relay terminal board G. With such a configuration, one-way communication from the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH to the hall computer HC can be physically secured, and the main control board M and the main control board M from the hall computer HC side can be secured. This is to prevent the goto act (so-called remote control goto) of illegally operating the prize ball payout control board KH. In this example, a mechanism using a relay coil is configured to enable one-way communication to the hall computer HC while preventing a goto action, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a pair of light emitting units can be used. A photosensor having a light receiving unit also enables one-way communication (for example, light from a light emitting unit connected to the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH is received by a light receiving unit connected to the hall computer HC. It should be added that the signal can be received by reading by the unit.

However, since the configuration is such that the physical signal (switch state is on / off) is once replaced, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are one of the external relay terminal boards G for the hall computer HC. It is difficult to transmit complicated information using the input / output terminals, and one type of information is transmitted using the one input / output terminal (for example, if it is an output terminal for a special symbol fixed number of times). It is customary to configure so that only the information that "one change of the special symbol has been completed" can be transmitted).

Next, the processing on the prize ball payout control board KH side will be described in detail with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 46 to 57.

First, FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the main routine 4000 executed on the prize ball payout control board KH side. First, in step 4100, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes an error control process at the time of abnormality detection, which will be described later. Next, in step 4200, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes a prize ball payout-related information transmission / reception process, which will be described later, with the main control board M. Next, in step 4300, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes the prize ball payout control process (at the time of starting the prize ball payout / starting the motor drive), which will be described later. Next, in step 4400, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes the prize ball payout control process (at the end of motor drive / at the end of prize ball payout), which will be described later. Next, in step 4500, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes the prize ball payout control process (when the motor is driven), which will be described later. Then, in step 4600, the payout control board (payout control means) KH executes the motor error processing described later, and proceeds to step 4100.

Here, referring to the block diagram on the right side of the figure, the prize ball payout control board KH of the game machine in the present embodiment controls the transmission / reception of commands / information with the main control board M side, the card unit R side, and the like. A transmission / reception control means 3100 that controls the transmission / reception control means, an error control means 3200 that controls errors related to payout on the prize ball payout control board KH side, and a predetermined number of game balls that receive a prize ball payout command or a ball rental command. It has a payout control means 3300 and a payout control means 3300 for executing the payout process. Hereinafter, each means will be described in detail.

First, the transmission / reception control means 3100 transmits information to the reception control means 3110 that controls reception of information (for example, commands and signals) from the main control board M and the card unit R, and information to the main control board M and the card unit R. It has a transmission control means 3120 that controls control.

Here, the reception control means 3110 further includes a main side reception control means 3111 that controls reception of information (for example, a command) from the main control board M. The main-side reception control means 3111 further includes a main-side reception information temporary storage means 3111a in which the information transmitted from the main control board M side is temporarily stored. Further, the transmission control means 3120 further includes a payout-related error information temporary storage means 3121 in which error information related to the payout operation for transmission to the main control board M side is temporarily stored.

Next, the error control means 3200 detected an error flag temporary storage means 3221 for temporarily storing the on / off state of the error flag such as payout on the prize ball payout control board KH side, and a payout motor operation abnormality. Error control means 3230 when a payout motor operation abnormality is detected, error control means 3240 when a payout error is detected, and an error when a ball path abnormality is detected. Error control means 3250 at the time of ball path abnormality detection that controls control, error control means 3260 at the time of payout motor error detection that controls error control when a payout motor abnormality is detected, and a fatal abnormality related to the prize ball payout operation are detected. An error control means 3270 for detecting a payout stop error that controls the error control when the error is made, a ball bite error generation timer 3200t that manages the error notification period when a ball bite error occurs in the prize ball payout unit KE10, and a ball bite error generation timer 3200t. Further, it has a non-passing error generation timer 3200t2 that manages the error notification period when a non-passing error of the payout count sensor KE10s occurs. Here, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 further has an illegal payout accumulation counter 3231 for accumulating and counting the number of times when the payout motor operation abnormality is detected. Further, the error control means 3240 at the time of detecting a payout abnormality further has an excess payout cumulative counter 3241 for accumulating and counting the number of payouts of the excess prize balls. Further, the error control means 3250 at the time of detecting a ball path abnormality further includes a payout interval extension control means 3251 that executes a time extension process of the payout interval related to the prize ball payout. Further, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 further includes a retry operation control means 3261 for executing a retry operation (retry operation) for eliminating the abnormal operation of the payout motor KE10m.

Next, the payout control means 3300 has a payout process-related information temporary storage means 3310 for temporarily storing information necessary for the payout process. Here, the payout processing-related information temporary storage means 3310 temporarily stores the payout-related state (for example, whether or not the payout is in progress or whether or not a payout abnormality has occurred), and the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311. The payout counter 3312, in which the number of game balls to be paid out is set during the payout process, the step counter temporary storage means 3313 for temporarily storing the number of steps to be driven by the payout motor KE10m, and the payout motor KE10m are driven. Excited stator position specifying counter value temporary storage means 3314 for temporarily storing the position information of the excited stator, and a predetermined time (waiting for ball passage) after one continuous payout operation (unit payout operation). It further has a ball passage waiting counter 3315 for measuring the time (time / motor pause time), and a unit payout counter 3317 in which the number of game balls to be paid out by the unit payout operation is set. Here, in the present embodiment, the ball passage waiting timer 3315 is a decrement type timer, and is configured to stop when the timer value becomes 0, but is not limited to this, and is an increment type. It can also be configured using a timer. Hereinafter, each subroutine will be described in detail.

Next, FIG. 47 is a flowchart of the error control process at the time of abnormality detection according to the subroutine of step 4100 of FIG. First, in step 4110, the error control means 3200 executes an error control process when a payout motor operation abnormality is detected, which will be described later. Next, in step 4120, the error control means 3200 executes an error control process at the time of payout abnormality detection, which will be described later. Next, in step 4140, the error control means 3200 executes an error control process at the time of detecting a ball path abnormality, which will be described later. Next, in step 4170, the error control means 3200 executes an error control process when a payout motor abnormality is detected, which will be described later. Next, in step 4190, the error control means 3200 executes an error control process when a payout stop abnormality is detected, which will be described later, and shifts to the next process (prize ball payout related information transmission / reception process in step 4200).

Next, FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the error control process at the time of detecting a payout motor operation abnormality according to the subroutine of step 4110 of FIG. 47. First, the purpose of this process is to count the number of occurrences of the abnormality when a payout motor operation abnormality, which will be described later, is detected, and to indicate the occurrence of an error when the number of occurrences of the abnormality exceeds the threshold value. Is to turn on. First, in step 4111, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and determines whether or not the payout motor operation abnormality detection flag is on. Here, as will be described later, the payout motor operation abnormality detection flag detects the passage of the game ball by the payout count sensor KE10s under the condition that the prize ball payout process is not executed on the prize ball payout control board KH side. This is a flag that turns on when this is done (delivery motor operation error). In the case of Yes in step 4111, in step 4112, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the payout motor operation abnormality detection flag. Next, in step 4113, the error control means 3230 at the time of detecting an abnormality in the payout motor operation adds 1 (increments) the counter value of the illegal payout cumulative counter 3231. Next, in step 4114, the error control means 3230 at the time of detecting an abnormality in the payout motor refers to the counter value of the illegal payout cumulative counter 3231, and determines whether or not the count value is a predetermined number (for example, 25) or more. do. In the case of Yes in step 4114, in step 4115, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 turns on the payout motor operation error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4116. Even if No in step 4111 or 4114, the process proceeds to step 4116.

Next, in step 4116, the error control means 3230 at the time of detecting an abnormality in the payout motor refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the payout motor operation error flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4116, in step 4119, the payout motor operation abnormality detection error control means 3230 sets the payout motor operation error as the payout-related error information in the payout-related error information temporary storage means 3121, and performs the next process ( The process proceeds to the error control process when a payout abnormality is detected in step 4120). Even if No in step 4116, the process proceeds to the next process (error control process when a payout abnormality is detected in step 4120).

Next, FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the error control process at the time of payout abnormality detection according to the subroutine of step 4120 of FIG. 47. First, the purpose of this process is to count the number of excessive game ball payouts caused by the abnormality when a payout error described later is detected, and when the count number exceeds the threshold value. Turn on the flag that indicates the occurrence of an error. First, in step 4121, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and determines whether or not the payout abnormality detection flag is on. Here, as will be described later, the payout abnormality detection flag exceeds the predetermined number of prize ball payouts based on the command transmitted from the main control board M side, and when an excessive payout of game balls is detected (payout). It is a flag that is turned on when (abnormal). In the case of Yes in step 4121, in step 4122, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the payout abnormality detection flag. Next, in step 4123, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 acquires the excess payout number temporarily stored in the payout processing-related information temporary storage means 3310, and transfers the excess payout number to the excess payout cumulative counter 3241. to add. Next, in step 4124, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 refers to the counter value of the excess payout cumulative counter 3241, and determines whether or not the count value is a predetermined number (for example, 25) or more. In the case of Yes in step 4124, in step 4125, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 turns on the excessive payout error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4126. Even if No in step 4121 or 4124, the process proceeds to step 4126. The overpayment error (state in which the overpayment error flag is on) is configured to be resolved only by turning on the power again, but this example is merely an example and is not limited to this. For example, the error may be resolved by pressing the error canceling switch, elapse of a predetermined time, or the like.

Next, in step 4126, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the excessive payout error flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4126, in step 4129, the payout abnormality detection error control means 3240 sets the excessive payout error as the payout-related error information in the payout-related error information temporary storage means 3121, and the next process (step 4140). Move to error control processing when ball path abnormality is detected). Even if No in step 4126, the process proceeds to the next process (error control process when ball path abnormality is detected in step 4140).

Next, FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the error control process at the time of ball path abnormality detection according to the subroutine of step 4140 of FIG. 47. First, the purpose of this process is that when a ball path abnormality, which will be described later, is detected, (1) an abnormality occurs in which a game ball does not exist in the prize ball tank KT or the prize ball payout unit KE10 (ball out). Or, if an abnormality has occurred in which the number of game balls existing in the prize ball payout unit KE10 is small (ball shortage) has occurred, and if an abnormality corresponding to the ball out abnormality or the ball shortage abnormality is detected. , Turn on the flag that indicates the occurrence of an error. In addition, (2) when an abnormality corresponding to a ball shortage abnormality or a ball shortage abnormality is detected, the waiting time until the ball shortage abnormality or the ball shortage abnormality is resolved by extending the payout interval of the prize ball payout. Is to create. First, in step 4141, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and determines whether or not the ball path abnormality detection flag is on. Here, as will be described later, the ball path abnormality detection flag is at the end of execution of a predetermined number of payout operations (unit payout operations) scheduled on the prize ball payout control board KH side, and the motor drive operates normally. It is a flag to be turned on when a situation is detected in which the number of payouts is less than the predetermined number to be paid out in the situation where it is determined that the payout is made. In the case of Yes in step 4141, in step 4142, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the ball path abnormality detection flag. Next, in step 4143, the error control means 3250 at the time of detecting a ball path abnormality determines whether or not the condition for generating the ball out abnormality or the ball shortage abnormality is satisfied. Here, the conditions for generating the ball shortage abnormality or the ball shortage abnormality are not particularly limited, but for example, a game ball detection sensor is provided at a predetermined position in the prize ball tank KT or the prize ball payout unit KE10, and the detection sensor is used. An example in which an abnormality in ball breakage occurs when the presence of a game ball cannot be detected, or a ball flow path directly above the sprocket KE10p in the prize ball payout unit KE10 (in this example, the two ball flow paths are Existence) can be mentioned as an example in which a detection sensor for a game ball is provided in each of the detection sensors, and if the presence of the game ball cannot be detected by any of the detection sensors, the condition is that a ball shortage abnormality occurs. In the case of Yes in step 4143, in step 4144, the error control means 3250 at the time of detecting a ball path abnormality turns on the ball path error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221. Then, in step 4146, the ball path abnormality detection error control means 3250 sets the ball path error as the payout-related error information in the payout-related error information temporary storage means 3121, and proceeds to step 4151. Even if No in step 4141 or 4143, the process proceeds to step 4151.

Next, in step 4151, the error control means 3250 at the time of detecting a ball path abnormality refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the ball path error flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4151, in step 4152, the error control means 3250 at the time of detecting a ball path abnormality determines whether or not the condition for resolving the ball shortage abnormality or the ball shortage abnormality is satisfied. Here, the condition for resolving the ball shortage abnormality or the ball shortage abnormality is not particularly limited, and an example in which the abnormality is resolved when the above-mentioned ball shortage abnormality or ball shortage abnormality occurrence condition is unsatisfied. Can be mentioned. In the case of Yes in step 4152, in step 4153, the error control means 3250 at the time of detecting a ball path abnormality turns off the ball path error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221. Then, in step 4155, the payout interval extension control means 3251 continuously excites a predetermined number of payout operations at a speed of one in 3 ms × 8 steps = 24 ms during normal operation) and balls. A passing waiting time (for example, 500 ms) is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (error control process when a payout motor abnormality is detected in step 4170). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4152, in step 4156, the payout interval extension control means 3251 sets the excitation timing and the ball passage waiting time so that the payout speed of one ball is relatively low as compared with the normal operation. The change is made, and the process proceeds to the next process (error control process when a payout motor abnormality is detected in step 4170). Even if No in step 4151, the process proceeds to the next process (error control process when a payout motor abnormality is detected in step 4170). Here, the excitation timing to be changed is not particularly limited, but for example, after executing the payout operation for one ball at a speed of one in 3 ms × 8 steps = 24 ms, a waiting time (for example, 5 seconds) is waited for. An example may be given in which a time is set and the excitation timing is changed so that the payout operation is executed again at a speed of 1 in 3 ms × 8 steps = 24 ms after the waiting time has elapsed. Further, the waiting time for passing the ball to be changed is not particularly limited (for example, changed from 500 ms to 30 seconds).

Next, FIG. 51 is a flowchart of the payout motor abnormality detection error control process according to the subroutine of step 4170 of FIG. 47. First, the purpose of this process is to turn on the flag indicating the occurrence of an error when a payout motor abnormality, which will be described later, is detected, and to retry the payout motor (stepping motor KE10m in the prize ball payout unit KE10). It is to execute the switching control process. First, in step 4171, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and determines whether or not the payout motor abnormality detection flag is on. Here, as will be described later, the payout motor abnormality detection flag is a flag that is turned on when it is determined that the motor drive is not operating normally due to an external factor such as a ball. In the case of Yes in step 4171, in step 4172, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 turns off the payout motor abnormality detection flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311. Next, in step 4173, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 turns on the payout motor error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221. Next, in step 4175, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 sets the payout motor error as the payout-related error information in the payout-related error information temporary storage means 3121. Then, in step 4176, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 turns on the retry operation execution standby flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and proceeds to step 4177. Even if No in step 4171, the process proceeds to step 4177. Here, the retry operation execution standby flag is a flag for setting the retry operation in a standby state for a predetermined time after a motor error, which will be described later, and providing a waiting time for resolving the motor error within the predetermined time.

Next, in step 4177, the payout motor abnormality detection error control means 3260 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221 and determines whether or not the payout motor error flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4177, in step 4178, the retry operation control means 3261 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the retry operation execution permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4178, in step 4179, the retry operation control means 3261 turns off the retry operation execution permission flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311. Next, in step 4180, the retry operation control means 3261 sets a predetermined number of steps during the retry operation as the step counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313. Here, although the number of predetermined steps during the retry operation is not particularly limited, an example may be mentioned in which the number is the same as the confirmation timing of the rotor position confirmation sensor KE10 ms during the retry operation, which will be described later. Next, in step 4181, the retry operation control means 3261 sets 0 as the excitation stator position specifying counter value (j) in the excitation stator position specifying counter value temporary storage means 3314. Next, in step 4182, the retry operation control means 3261 is switched between an excitation method for the retry operation related to the stepping motor operation (for example, a well-known 1-2 phase excitation method) and a one-step switching speed for the retry operation (for example,). 6ms) is set. Next, in step 4183, the retry operation control means 3261 sets a predetermined value (for example, 500 ms) as the ball passage waiting time / motor pause time related to the stepping motor operation in the ball passage waiting timer 3315. Next, in step 4184, the retry operation control means 3261 turns on the retry operation in-execution flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311. Then, in step 4185, the retry operation control means 3261 turns on the motor driving flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and shifts to the next process (error control process when a payout stop abnormality is detected in step 4190). do. Even if No in step 4177 or 4178, the process proceeds to the next process (error control process when a payout stop abnormality is detected in step 4190).

Next, FIG. 52 is a flowchart of an error control process when a payout stop abnormality is detected, which is related to the subroutine of step 4190 of FIG. 47. First, the purpose of this process is to turn on the flag indicating the occurrence of an error when a fatal abnormality related to the continuation of the prize ball payout process is detected, and to turn on the flag indicating the occurrence of the error and to continue the prize ball payout process. It is impossible to continue the prize ball payout process until the abnormality is resolved. Here, the fatal abnormalities related to the continuation of the prize ball payout process are communication abnormalities between the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH, communication abnormalities between the card unit R and the prize ball payout control board KH, and payout. Examples include a sensor abnormality of the count sensor KE10s, a saucer (upper plate) full tank abnormality, and the like. First, in step 4191-1, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting the payout stop abnormality refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and determines whether or not the payout motor error flag is switched from off to on. In the case of Yes in step 4191-1, in step 4191-2, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality sets the ball biting error occurrence timer 3200t with an error duration (for example, 120 seconds) and starts the error control means. The process proceeds to step 4192-1. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4191-1, in step 4191-3, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality refers to the ball biting error generation timer 3200t and determines whether or not the timer value is 0. judge. In the case of Yes in step 4191-3, in step 4191-4, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality turns off the payout motor error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and goes to step 4192-1. Transition. On the other hand, even if No in step 4191-3, the process proceeds to step 4192-1.

Next, in step 4192-1, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and determines whether or not the switch non-passing error detection flag has been switched from off to on. In the case of Yes in step 4192-1, in step 4192-2, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting the payout stop abnormality sets the error duration (for example, 120 seconds) in the non-passing error occurrence timer 3200t2 and starts it. Move to step 4193-1. On the other hand, if No in step 4192-1, in step 4192-3, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality refers to the non-passing error occurrence timer 3200t2 and determines whether or not the timer value is 0. judge. In the case of Yes in step 4192-3, in step 4192-4, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality turns off the switch non-passing error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and step 4193-1. Move to. On the other hand, even if No in step 4192-3, the process proceeds to step 4193-1.

Next, in step 4193-1, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting the payout stop abnormality determines whether or not the error release switch KH3a is pressed. In the case of Yes in step 4193-1, in steps 4193-2 to 4193-5, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality is a flag related to an error including the pressing of the error release switch KH3a as an error release condition ( For example, the payout motor operation error flag, the game ball detection flag when the payout operation is not completed, the payout motor error flag, and the switch non-passage error detection flag) are turned off, and the process proceeds to step 4194-1. On the other hand, even if No in step 4193-1, the process proceeds to step 4194-1.

Next, in step 4194-1, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality determines whether or not a communication abnormality between the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH is detected. In the case of Yes in step 4194-1, in step 4194-2, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality turns on the communication error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4195-1. .. On the other hand, if No in step 4194-1, in step 4194-3, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality turns off the communication error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4195-1. Transition.

Next, in step 4195-1, the error control means 3270 when a payout stop abnormality is detected has a sensor abnormality of the payout count sensor KE10s (for example, there is no input from the count sensor, or the input value is constant for a predetermined time or longer). Yes, etc.) is determined. In the case of Yes in step 4195-1, in step 4195-2, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality turns on the prize ball device error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4196-1. Transition. On the other hand, if No in step 4195-1, in step 4195-3, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality turns off the prize ball device error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and step 4196-. Move to 1.

Next, in step 4196-1, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting the payout stop abnormality determines whether or not the saucer (upper plate) full tank abnormality is detected. In the case of Yes in step 4196-1, in step 4196-2, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting the payout stop abnormality turns on the saucer full tank error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221. Next, in step 4196-3, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality transmits a saucer full tank command to the sub-control board S side, and proceeds to step 4197-1. On the other hand, if No in step 4196-1, in step 4196-4, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality turns off the saucer full tank error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221. Next, in step 4196-5, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality transmits a saucer full tank release command to the sub-control board S side, and proceeds to step 4197-1.

Next, in step 4197-1, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting the payout stop abnormality determines whether or not the connection abnormality of the card unit R is detected. In the case of Yes in step 4197-1, in step 4197-2, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality turns on the CR unit unconnected error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and steps 4198-1. Move to. On the other hand, if No in step 4197-1, in step 4197-3, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality turns off the CR unit unconnected error flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and steps 4198. Move to -1.

Next, in step 4198-1, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and a part of the error related to the payout operation stop (for example, an excessive payout error, a prize ball device). It is determined whether or not all the flags related to (error, payout motor operation error, game ball detection when payout operation is not completed, payout motor error, switch non-passing error) are off.

In the case of Yes in step 4198-1, in step 4198-2, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and the communication error flag, the prize ball device error flag, and the saucer are full. It is determined whether or not all the error flags of the error flag and the CR unit unconnected error flag are off. In the case of Yes in step 4198-2, in step 4198-3, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting a payout stop abnormality executes a normal payout operation in the payout control means 3300 (that is, a payout operation in step 4198-4 described later). Is paused, the payout operation is restarted), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 4200). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 4198-1 or step 4198-2, in step 4198-4, the error control means 3270 at the time of detecting the payout stop abnormality forcibly suspends the payout operation in the payout control means 3300, and then the next step. (Processing in step 4200).

Next, FIG. 53 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout related information reception process (to the main control board) according to the subroutine of step 4200 of FIG. Here, the first half of the flow is the information reception process from the main control board M (and the set processing of the number of prize balls to be paid out), and the second half of the flow is the information transmission process to the main control board M. Therefore, to explain from the information reception process from the main control board M in the first half (and the set process of the number of prize balls to be paid out), first, in step 4205, the main side reception control means 3111 is the payout state flag temporary storage means. With reference to 3311, it is determined whether or not the prize ball payout flag is off. Here, the "prize ball payout flag" means that the prize ball payout process is being executed on the payout control side (when the payout motor of the payout device is in the driving operation, the ball passing waiting time, and the motor pause time). It is a flag that is turned on when (when it is inside). In the case of Yes in step 4205, in step 4210, the main side reception control means 3111 refers to the main side reception information temporary storage means 3111a, and determines whether or not the prize ball payout command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 4210, in step 4215, the payout control means 3300 accesses the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns on the prize ball payout start permission flag. Next, in step 4220, the payout control means 3300 derives the number of prize balls to be paid out this time based on the prize ball payout command information temporarily stored in the main side received information temporary storage means 3111a, and pays out the prize balls. The number information is set in the payout counter 3312, and the process proceeds to the next process (step 4225). This completes the process of setting the number of prize balls to be paid out when the normal prize ball payout process is executed. In addition, even if No in step 4205 and step 4210, the process proceeds to the next process (step 4225).

Next, to explain the information transmission process to the main control board M, first, in step 4225, the transmission control means 3120 refers to the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and whether or not the payout-related error transmission flag is on. Is determined. Here, the "payout-related error transmission flag" is when the above-mentioned payout-related error {payout motor operation error, excessive payout error, ball out error, ball shortage error, payout motor error, payout stop error} occurs. This is a flag that is turned on and turned off after the error notification is sent to the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 4225, in step 4230, the error control means 3200 turns off the payout-related error transmission flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221. Then, in step 4235, the transmission control means 3120 transmits the payout-related error information set in the payout-related error information temporary storage means 3121 to the main control board M side, and proceeds to the next process (step 4240). Even if No in step 4225, the process proceeds to the next process (step 4240).

Next, in step 4240, the transmission control means 3120 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and determines whether or not the prize ball payout completion flag is on. Here, the "prize ball payout completion flag" is a flag that is turned on when it is determined by the payout control means 3300 that the prize ball payout is completed. In the case of Yes in step 4240, in step 4245, the transmission control means 3120 accesses the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the prize ball payout completion flag. Then, in step 4250, the transmission control means 3120 transmits information to the effect that the prize ball payout is completed to the main control board M side, and the next process {prize ball payout control process (prize ball payout start) in step 4300.・ At the start of motor drive)}. Even if No in step 4240, the process proceeds to the next process {prize ball payout control process in step 4300 (at the time of starting the prize ball payout / starting the motor drive)}. This completes the prize ball payout completion information transmission process.

Next, FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout control process (at the time of starting the prize ball payout / starting the motor drive) according to the subroutine of step 4300 of FIG. Here, the process is a process before executing the motor drive process of the next step 4400, and the number of steps of the motor drive and the like are determined in response to receiving the prize ball payout command from the main control board M side. It is a process to set. First, in step 4305, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and determines whether or not the prize ball payout start permission flag (see step 4215 in FIG. 53) is on. In the case of Yes in step 4305, in step 4310 and step 4315, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns on the prize ball payout flag, and turns off the prize ball payout start permission flag. do.

Next, in step 4320, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not the number of prize balls to be paid out set in the payout counter 3312 is a predetermined number (for example, three) or more. In the case of Yes in step 4320, in step 4325, the payout control means 3300 temporarily stores the counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313 so that a predetermined number of payouts can be made, and proceeds to step 4332. The counter value (n) temporarily stored here is the number of steps of the stepping motor. On the other hand, if No in step 4320, the payout control means 3300 temporarily stores the counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313 so that the number of prize balls to be paid out set in the payout counter 3312 is paid out, and the step. Move to 4332.

Next, in step 4332, the payout control means 3300 sets the payout scheduled number in the unit payout operation (that is, the payout number scheduled in step 4325 or step 4330) in the unit payout counter 3317. Next, in step 4335, the payout control means 3300 sets 0 as the excitation stator position specifying counter value (j). Here, the excitation stator position specifying counter indicates the relative position of the rotor with respect to the stator, and "0" corresponds to the default position at the time of payout standby (stop). Next, in step 4337, the payout control means 3300 switches between an excitation method for normal operation (for example, a well-known 2-2-phase excitation method) related to stepping motor operation and a one-step switching speed for normal operation (for example, 3 ms). ) Is set. Next, in step 4338, the payout control means 3300 sets a predetermined value (for example, 500 ms) as the ball passing waiting time / motor pause time related to the stepping motor operation in the ball passing waiting timer 3315. Next, in step 4339, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the retry operation executing flag. Here, the retry operation executing flag is a flag that is turned on during the retry operation related to the stepping motor operation as described above. Then, in step 4340, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns on the motor driving flag, and performs the next process {the prize ball payout control process of step 4400 (at the end of motor drive / prize). At the end of ball payout)}.

On the other hand, if No in step 4305, in step 4345, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the motor driving flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4345, since the motor has already been driven, the process proceeds to the next process {prize ball payout control process in step 4400 (at the end of motor drive / at the end of prize ball payout)}.

On the other hand, if No in step 4345, in step 4350, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the prize ball payout continuation flag is off. Here, the prize ball payout continuation flag is a case where the prize ball payout operation should be continued after the stepping motor operation for a predetermined number of steps in the unit payout operation and when the ball passage waiting time / motor pause time has elapsed (the prize ball payout continuation flag). It is a flag that is turned on (detailed conditions will be described later). In the case of Yes in step 4350, the process proceeds to the next process {prize ball payout control process in step 4400 (at the end of motor drive / at the end of prize ball payout)}.

On the other hand, if No in step 4350, in step 4352, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the prize ball payout continuation flag. Then, in step 4354, the payout control means 3300 refers to the unit payout counter 3317, and whether or not the counter value exceeds 0 (that is, whether or not all the planned payouts by the current unit payout operation have been paid out). Whether or not) is determined. In the case of Yes in step 4354, in step 4356, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns on the ball path abnormality detection flag, and proceeds to step 4320. On the other hand, if No in step 4354, the process proceeds to step 4320 without executing step 4356. That is, when the prize ball payout continuation flag is on, the process of setting the number of steps for driving the motor and the like is executed again without triggering the reception of the prize ball payout command from the main control board M side. If it is determined that not all of the planned payouts due to the unit payout operation have been paid out, the occurrence of an abnormality that causes a ball out error or a ball shortage error is detected.

Next, FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout control process (at the end of motor drive / at the end of prize ball payout) according to the subroutine of step 4400 of FIG. Here, the process is an end process when all the motors scheduled to be driven and terminated in the previous process (step 4300) are executed, or all the prize ball payouts scheduled are executed. .. Here, the motor drive end process is executed from step 4402 to step 4419, the game ball detection process is executed from step 4420 to step 4425, and the prize ball payout end process is executed from step 4430 to step 4462.

First, to explain from the motor drive termination process, first, in step 4402, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and determines whether or not the prize ball payout flag is on. do. In the case of Yes in step 4402, in step 4405, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the motor driving flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4405, in step 4410, the payout control means 3300 refers to the counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313, and whether or not the counter value is 0, that is, the step of FIG. 54. It is determined whether or not all the steps in the current unit payout operation set in 4325 or step 4330 have been executed. In the case of Yes in step 4410, in step 4415, the payout control means 3300 accesses the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the motor driving flag. Next, in step 4416, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and determines whether or not the retry operation executing flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4416, in step 4417, the payout control means 3300 accesses the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns off the retry operation executing flag, and proceeds to step 4418. On the other hand, if No in step 4416, the process proceeds to step 4418. Next, in step 4418, the payout control means 3300 maintains the dormant state of the stepping motor (in this example, after lowering the excitation output, it is continuously excited to the current excitation stator position specifying counter value (j)). Next, in step 4419, the payout control means 3300 starts the ball passage waiting timer 3315 and shifts to step 4420. In addition, even if No in step 4405 or step 4410, the process proceeds to step 4420. This completes the motor drive termination process.

Next, to explain the game ball detection process, first, in step 4420, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not the game ball detection signal has been received from the payout count sensor KE10s. In the case of Yes in step 4420, in step 4422, the payout control means 3300 subtracts 1 from the counter value temporarily stored in the unit payout counter 3317. Next, in step 4425, the payout control means 3300 subtracts 1 from the counter value temporarily stored in the payout counter 3312, and proceeds to step 4430. Even if No in step 4420, the process proceeds to step 4430. Here, in this example, the value of the payout counter 3312 is configured to be decremented by 1 each time an incoming ball is detected, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the incoming ball of a plurality of game balls is detected. If so, it may be configured so that the value corresponding to the number of balls entered can be subtracted. This completes the game ball detection processing.

Next, to explain the prize ball payout end process, first, in step 4430, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout counter 3312 and determines whether or not the count value is 0 or less. In the case of Yes in step 4430, in step 4431, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the motor driving flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 4431 (that is, when the sensor detects as many game balls as the number of game balls related to the payout even though the driving of the motor related to the payout is not completed), in step 4432. The payout control means 3300 turns on the game ball detection flag when the payout is not completed in the error flag temporary storage means 3221, and proceeds to step 4435. On the other hand, even if No in step 4431, the process proceeds to step 4435.

Next, in steps 4435 and 4440, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns off the prize ball payout flag, and turns on the prize ball payout completion flag. Next, in step 4441, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout counter 3312 and determines whether or not the count value is less than 0. In the case of Yes in step 4441, in step 4442, the payout control means 3300 turns on the payout abnormality detection flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311. Next, in step 4443, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout counter 3312, and the number of overpayments is based on the count value (for example, if the counter value is “-3”, the number of overpayments is “3”). Is temporarily stored in the payout process-related information temporary storage means 3310, and the process proceeds to the next process {prize ball payout control process (at the time of motor drive execution) in step 4500}. Even if No in step 4441 (that is, when the count value of the payout counter 3312 is 0 and the predetermined number of payouts is normally paid out), the next process {prize ball payout control process in step 4500 is performed. (When driving the motor)}. In this example, the excess payout is detected when the value of the payout counter 3312 becomes 0 or less, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, after the motor related to the payout is driven. Excessive payout detection (value of payout counter 3312 is less than 0) when a predetermined time (for example, sufficient detection waiting time until the game ball paid out by the drive is detected by the payout count sensor KE10s) has elapsed. It may be configured to be able to execute (determination of whether or not it is) (that is, excessive payout is an unforeseen situation in which the number of game balls to be paid out exceeds the number of game balls to be paid out). This unforeseen situation, which means that it has occurred and is extremely unlikely to occur in terms of design, means that one of the payout mechanisms has a problem, or that fraudulent activity has occurred during the payout operation. It means that it is likely to have been done).

On the other hand, if No in step 4430, in step 4445, the payout control means 3300 refers to the timer value of the ball passage waiting timer 3315 and determines whether or not the timer value is 0. In the case of Yes in step 4445, in step 4446, the payout control means 3300 turns on the switch non-passage error detection flag in the error flag temporary storage means 3221 (in this example, it is predetermined after the payout operation is completed). If the number of game balls related to the payout operation is not detected even after the waiting time for passing the ball has elapsed, it is immediately determined that a switch non-passing error has occurred. It is not limited, and may be configured to determine that a switch non-passage error has occurred when the event occurs multiple times).

Next, in step 4447, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the retry operation execution standby flag is off. Here, the retry operation execution standby flag is a flag that is turned on when a motor error occurs while the motor is being driven, as described above. In the case of Yes in step 4447, in step 4450, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns on the prize ball payout continuation flag, and next process {the prize ball payout control process in step 4500 ( When the motor drive is executed)}. On the other hand, if No in step 4447, in step 4460 and 4462, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, turns off the retry operation execution standby flag, and sets the retry operation execution permission flag. Turn it on and move to the next process {prize ball payout control process in step 4500 (when driving the motor)}. Even if No in step 4445, the process proceeds to the next process {prize ball payout control process in step 4500 (when the motor is driven)}.

Here, in the case of No in step 4402 (that is, when the prize ball payout process is not being executed), whether or not the payout control means 3300 has received the game ball detection signal from the payout count sensor KE10s in step 4470. To judge. In the case of Yes in step 4470, in step 4472, the payout control means 3300 turns on the payout motor operation abnormality detection flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and next processing {the prize ball payout control process in step 4500 ( When the motor is driven)}. Even if No in step 4470, the process proceeds to the next process {prize ball payout control process in step 4500 (when the motor is driven)}.

Next, FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the prize ball payout control process (at the time of motor drive execution) according to the subroutine of step 4500 of FIG. Here, the process is a process of actually executing the motor drive based on the number of steps set in the previous process (step 4400). First, in step 4505, the payout control means 3300 refers to the flag area of the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and determines whether or not the motor driving flag is on. The motor driving flag is a flag that is turned on when a predetermined number of step counters is set in the step counter temporary storage means 3313 (see step 4340 in FIG. 54), and corresponds to the predetermined number of step counters. A flag that turns off when all excitation is performed. Here, in the case of Yes in step 4505, in step 4510, the payout control means 3300 subtracts 1 from the step counter value (n) of the step counter temporary storage means 3313. Next, in step 4520, the payout control means 3300 updates (1 increments) the excitation stator position specifying counter value (j) in the excitation stator position specifying counter value temporary storage means 3314. Next, in step 4525, the payout control means 3300 excites the stator corresponding to the excitation stator position specifying counter value (j) in the excitation stator position specifying counter value temporary storage means 3314 based on a predetermined excitation method and switching speed. ..

Next, in step 4530, the payout control means 3300 determines whether or not the counter value (j) in the excitation stator position specifying counter value temporary storage means 3314 is the confirmation timing of the rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms. Here, the confirmation of the rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms is performed for the purpose of confirming whether or not an abnormal operation (step-out phenomenon due to ball scuffing or the like) related to the motor operation has occurred. In the case of Yes in step 4530, in step 4550, the payout control means 3300 refers to the presence / absence of the detection signal from the rotor position confirmation sensor KE10ms. Then, in step 4555, the error control means 3200 determines whether or not the rotor is rotating correctly, that is, whether or not a motor error has occurred, based on the presence or absence of the detection signal in step 4550. In the case of Yes in step 4555, in step 4560, the error control means 3200 turns on the motor position abnormality flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311, and shifts to the next process (motor error time process in step 4600). Even if No in step 4530, the process proceeds to the next process (processing at the time of motor error in step 4600), and if No in step 4555, in step 4565, the error control means 3200 temporarily stores the error flag. The motor error flag in the means 3221 is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (motor error process in step 4600).

Next, FIG. 57 is a flowchart of motor error processing according to the subroutine of step 4600 of FIG. First, the purpose of this process is to forcibly shift the motor drive to the hibernate state when a motor error is detected. First, in step 4605, the payout control means 3300 refers to the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and determines whether or not the motor position abnormality flag is on. Here, as shown in step 4560 of FIG. 56, whether or not the motor exists at a predetermined rotation position is detected at a predetermined detection timing, and if the motor does not exist at the predetermined rotation position, step-out or the like is performed. This motor position abnormality flag is turned on. In the case of Yes in step 4605, in step 4610, the payout control means 3300 accesses the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311 and turns off the motor position abnormality flag. Next, in step 4615, the payout control means 3300 turns on the payout motor abnormality detection flag in the payout state flag temporary storage means 3311. Then, in step 4620, the error control means 3200 clears the step counter value (n) in the step counter temporary storage means 3313, and shifts to the next process (error control process at the time of abnormality detection in step 4100). This is because the number of steps set this time is no longer executed due to the occurrence of a motor error, and after the count value is cleared, the motor drive shifts to the hibernate state (step 4410 and step in FIG. 55). See 4415). Even if No in step 4605, the process proceeds to the next process (error control process when an abnormality is detected in step 4100).

Next, the control process executed on the sub-main control unit SM side will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 78. First, FIG. 58 is a main flowchart of the sub-control board S side (particularly, the sub-main control unit SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. Here, the process of FIG. 3D is a process on the sub-main control unit SM side that is executed after a reset such as when the power is turned on to the gaming machine. That is, when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, in step 5002, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes initial processing based on the information received from the main side (main control board M side) (for example, RAM clear information). → Initialize the RAM on the sub side, and receive various information commands → Reset the effect-related information at the time of power failure to the RAM on the sub side). Next, in step 5004, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S deletes the information indicating that it is a trigger hold (hold that won the look-ahead lottery) from the temporarily stored information related to the hold (meaning that it is a trigger hold). If there is no hold with the information of Reset the processing related to). The processing at the time of power failure is not limited to this, and even after the power failure is restored, the information indicating that the trigger is on hold, the information related to the hold display mode, and the state related to the display mode of the change suggestion display can be deleted. Instead, it may be configured so that various effects such as a look-ahead effect can be continued. In such a configuration, for example, a save area capable of maintaining information even during a power failure is provided on the sub side, and when a power failure occurs, the information related to the effect is backed up in the save area and the power is restored. It may be configured to restore the backed up information from time to time. In addition, when the power is restored, when the fluctuation starts, when the fluctuation is stopped, or when the hold occurs (even for the hold other than the newly generated hold), the information related to the hold and the content of the change suggestion display is input from the main control board M side. It may be configured to receive again. {Although not shown in this example, only the information related to the number of holds is transmitted from the main control board M side at the time of recovery from the power failure (in the contents of the hold). Such information is not transmitted). Therefore, since the information related to the hold that existed at the time of the power failure does not exist after the power is restored, the look-ahead effect cannot be executed for the hold (note that the information is held from the main side when the power is restored). It may be configured to receive the information relating to the above, and to be able to execute the look-ahead effect for the hold). If a power failure occurs during the change of the decorative symbol, and if the function for maintaining the information at the time of the power failure is not provided, until the end command of the change is received from the main control board M side. In the meantime, a blackout screen (for example, a screen displaying "Preparing" etc.) will be displayed}. After that, the process shifts to the loop processing in which the iterative processing routine (f) of the sub-main control unit SM is repeatedly executed. Here, when (f) is executed, first, in step 5200, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the customization control process described later, as shown in the process of the figure (f). Next, in step 5500, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the hold information management process described later. Next, in step 5700, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the decorative symbol display content determination process described later. Next, in step 5800, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the decorative symbol display control process described later. Next, in step 5900, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the special game-related display control process described later. Next, in step 5999, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the display command transmission control process (transmits the command set by these series of subroutines to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and ends this iterative process routine. do.

As described above, the sub-main control unit SM adopts a form in which the sub-main side routines (S5200 to S5999) are looped after being reset. Further, the process of FIG. 3E is an interrupt process of the sub-main control unit SM, and the signal from the STB signal line in the main control board M described above is one terminal of the CPU of the sub-main control unit SM (in this example). , NMI terminal), this is the processing flow (e). That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the CPU of the sub-main control unit SM (when the STB signal line is turned on), in step 5005, the sub-main control unit SM has a command input port (command input port from the main control board M side). Check the input port of the data signal line mentioned above). Then, in step 5006, the sub-main control unit SM has a command transmitted from the main control board M side to the RAM (for example, the main side information temporary storage means SM11b) on the sub-main control unit SM side based on the confirmation result. Is temporarily stored and returns to the processing that was executed immediately before this interrupt processing.

Next, FIG. 59 is a flowchart of the customization control process according to the subroutine of step 5200 in FIG. 58. First, in step 5202, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has a non-gaming period measurement timer value of the first guide value (a timer value for which the first customized guide screen is displayed, which is 5 seconds in this example) or more. Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 5202, in step 5204, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the first customization guidance screen in the foreground of the display area SG10. In this example, the volume level, light amount level, and advance notice frequency (these may be collectively referred to as gaming machine customization) can be changed by the player, and the screen for executing the gaming machine customization is performed. The display that informs the transition condition of is called the customization guidance screen. The customization guidance screen has a two-stage display mode depending on the non-game period, and since the non-game period can be displayed in a short time, the first customization guidance screen → the second customization guidance screen. The mode of notifying the transition condition of the screen for executing the game machine customization is not limited to this, and (1) display the first customization guidance screen at the timing when the non-game period measurement timer value reaches 5 seconds. Instead, the sub-input button SB and the cross-shaped key SB-2 are turned on (the lamps provided on the sub-input button SB and the cross-shaped key SB-2 are turned on), and the timing when the non-game period measurement timer value reaches 75 seconds. Displays the second customization guidance screen at (2) Sub-input button at the timing when the non-game period is started (non-game period measurement timer value = 0 and non-game period measurement timer measurement is started). The SB and the cross key SB-2 may be lit. Next, in step 5250, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the customization guidance screen display control process described later. Next, in step 5300, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the customization in-progress display control process described later, and shifts to the next process. If No in step 5202, in step 5350, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the customization control process during the game, which will be described later, and shifts to the next process.

Next, FIG. 60 is a flowchart of the customized guidance screen display control process according to the subroutine of step 5250 in FIG. 59. First, in step 5252, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the up / down buttons of the cross key SB-2 have been operated. The cross key SB-2 has four buttons, an up button, a down button, a right button, and a left button, as operable buttons. In the case of Yes in step 5252, in step 5255, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is displaying the customization guidance screen (the first customization guidance screen and the second customization guidance screen are collectively referred to as the customization guidance screen). It is determined whether or not it is. In the case of Yes in step 5255, in step 5256, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases the displayed customization screen, displays the light intensity adjustment screen in the foreground of the display area SG10, and proceeds to step 5268. On the other hand, even if No in step 5255, the process proceeds to step 5268. If you operate the up and down buttons of the cross key SB-2 while the standby demo screen is displayed, the light amount adjustment screen (screen for executing light amount adjustment) is not displayed, but the light amount can be adjusted. (It is the same process as the customization control process during the game, which will be described later).

If No in step 5252, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 5258 whether or not the sub-input button SB has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 5258, in step 5260, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases the displayed customization screen and standby demo screen, and displays the customization execution screen (screen for switching the advance notice frequency) in the display area. It is displayed in the foreground, and the process proceeds to step 5268. The configuration of the standby demo screen applicable to this example is as follows: (1) the volume during the standby demo screen display is relatively low or silent (details will be described later), and (2) standby. The demo display period (the maximum display period among the periods during which the standby demo screen can be displayed) is longer than the demo start value (240 seconds) (for example, 660 seconds), and (3) the standby demo screen. Even if the game ball does not enter the main game start port during the display, the display of the standby demo screen ends due to the detection of the launch handle D44. (4) The non-game period starts in the time-reduced game state. Even if the value (240 seconds) is reached, the standby demo screen is not displayed, and only the volume is the same as when the standby demo screen is displayed. And, the detection of the firing handle D44 when the standby demo screen is being displayed (or during a specific period of the non-gaming period), or when the maximum volume that can be output is relatively low (may be in a mute state). Displays a specific right-handed instruction display or outputs a voice (details will be described later), (6) While the standby demo screen is displayed, when the sub input button SB is operated, the customization execution screen is displayed on the front layer. , The symbol fluctuation stop display screen (the state where the normal decorative symbol stop symbol is displayed) is displayed on the rear layer, and the symbol fluctuation stop display screen is displayed depending on the detection of the launch handle D44, and the cross key SB-2 is pressed. If you operate it, the standby demo screen will continue to be displayed, but the volume and amount of light will be changed. As a specific display example of the standby demo screen, it may be configured to display a moving image for executing a game explanation or a motif introduction (character introduction or notice introduction) of the game machine. The display condition of the standby demo screen is not limited to the non-game period being the demo start value (240 seconds in this example), for example, the time during which the operation of the firing handle D44 is not detected. The standby demo screen is displayed when (or the time when the game ball is not fired) reaches the predetermined time A (10 seconds), and the maximum display time of the standby demo screen is configured to be the predetermined time B (100 seconds). You may. In such a configuration, the predetermined time A (10 seconds) is longer than the shortest fluctuation time (for example, 1.5 seconds) in the gaming machine and longer than the maximum fluctuation time (for example, 240 seconds). It's a short time. Further, the predetermined time B (10 seconds) is also longer than the shortest fluctuation time (for example, 1.5 seconds) in the gaming machine and shorter than the maximum fluctuation time (for example, 240 seconds). Further, it is the time during which the operation of the firing handle D44 is not detected (or the time during which the game ball is not fired), rather than the average time from when the game ball is launched onto the game board surface to when it flows into the out port D36. It is preferable that the predetermined time A (10 seconds) is longer (to prevent the standby demo screen from being displayed even though the player is firing the game ball).

If No in step 5258, in step 5262, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2 have been operated. If Yes in step 5262, in step 5264, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the volume control prohibition flag is off. If Yes in step 5264, in step 5265, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the customization guidance screen is being displayed. In the case of Yes in step 5265, in step 5266, the displayed customization screen is erased, the volume control screen is displayed in the foreground of the display area SG10, and the process proceeds to step 5268. If you operate the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2 while the standby demo screen is displayed, the volume control screen (screen for performing volume control) is not displayed, but the volume can be adjusted. (It is the same process as the customization control process during the game, which will be described later). In addition, the volume control screen may be hidden while the symbol fluctuation display, the standby demo screen is being displayed, or the symbol fluctuation stop display screen is being displayed, and the volume control screen is always displayed while the symbol fluctuation stop display screen is being displayed. It may be displayed so that the volume level can be adjusted with the cross key SB-2 and the display of the volume control screen can be changed according to the volume level, or the volume control screen can always be displayed during the symbol variation display. It may be displayed so that the cross key SB-2 can be used to adjust the volume level and change the display of the volume adjustment screen according to the volume level.

Here, to summarize the processes of steps 5262 to 5266,
(1) When the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2 are operated while the first customization guidance screen is being displayed and the volume adjustment prohibition flag is on → The volume adjustment screen is not displayed and the volume level is Cannot be changed (2) When the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2 are operated while the 1st customization guidance screen is displayed and the volume adjustment prohibition flag is off → The volume adjustment screen is displayed and according to the display. Volume level can be changed (3) When the left / right button of the cross key SB-2 is operated while the standby demo screen is displayed and the volume adjustment prohibition flag is off → The volume adjustment screen is not displayed (standby) The demo screen remains displayed), and the volume level can be changed.

Next, in step 5268, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the non-gaming period measurement timer value becomes the demo start value (240 seconds) or more. In the case of Yes in step 5268, in step 5270, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the standby demo screen in the foreground of the display area SG10. Next, in step 5272, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the demo screen mode in the sub-side game state type, and shifts to the next process (process of step 5300). In the present embodiment, the standby demo screen is displayed when the non-game period measurement timer value becomes the demo start value, but the display start condition of the standby demo screen is limited to this. For example, when the non-game period measurement timer value becomes the demo start value in the non-time shortened game state, the standby demo screen is displayed, while the non-game period measurement timer value starts the demo in the time shortened game state. When the value is reached, the standby demo screen may not be displayed (in the time-reduced gaming state, the standby demo screen may not be displayed regardless of the non-game period measurement timer value). In addition, in such a configuration, regardless of the gaming state, the volume output when the non-gaming period measurement timer value becomes the demo start value is "1" which is the volume of the demo screen mode or silence. That is, it may be configured to be lower or silent than the current volume setting value (volume determined by the volume switch and the volume level), and the light intensity may be similarly set to the current level. It may be configured to be lower than the set value of the light amount (the amount of light determined from the light amount level) or to be silent. Further, in the time-reduced gaming state, the non-game period measurement timer may not be measured (the timer value is always 0 and the time is not measured).

If No in step 5268, in step 5274, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has a non-gaming period measurement timer value as a second guide value (a timer value on which the second customized guide screen is displayed, and in this example, it is a timer value. , 75 seconds) or more. In the case of Yes in step 5274, in step 5276, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the second customization guidance screen in the foreground of the display area SG10, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 5300). Even if No in step 5264 or step 5274, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 5300). Although the customization guidance screen is not displayed during the standby demo screen display, the sub-input button SB and the cross-shaped key SB-2 are turned on (at the edge of the sub-input button SB and the cross-shaped key SB-2). It may be configured so that it is provided with a lamp that can be lit (it is lit even while the customization screen is displayed).

Next, FIG. 61 is an example of a customized guide screen image diagram according to the present embodiment. First, the upper left part is the first customization guidance screen, the upper right part is the second customization guidance screen, and the lower left part is the standby demo screen. The first customization guidance screen is displayed. On the first customization screen, it is displayed that the actual machine can be customized (change of the advance notice frequency) by pressing the sub input button SB, and the method of adjusting the volume and the amount of light is not displayed. The display of the first customization screen is semi-transparent, and even if the display of the first customization guidance screen and the decorative design are displayed overlapping, the decorative design can be visually recognized. Further, by pressing the sub input button SB while the first customization guidance screen is displayed, it is possible to customize the actual machine (change the advance notice frequency).

Next, after the first customization guidance screen is displayed, if 70 seconds have passed in the non-game state (75 seconds have passed since the non-game period), the second customization guidance screen will be displayed. Is displayed. In the second customized guide screen, in addition to the display mode of the first customized guide screen, a guide image for adjusting the volume and a guide image for adjusting the amount of light are added to the lower part of the display area SG10. The first customization guidance screen and the second customization guidance screen are semi-transparent like the first customization guidance screen.

Next, after the second customization guidance screen is displayed, when 165 seconds have passed in the non-game state (240 seconds have passed since the non-game period), the standby demo screen is displayed. Is displayed. On the standby demo screen, the display of the first customization guidance screen and the second customization guidance screen is deleted, and the story display and the like are displayed. The standby demo screen is not translucent, and if the display of the standby demo screen and the decorative symbol are displayed overlapping, the decorative symbol is invisible or difficult to see (display of the decorative symbol). The display area is smaller than the display of the standby demo screen, the display of the decorative pattern is displayed on the rear layer rather than the display of the standby demo screen, etc.). When the on-adjustment prohibition flag is on, the display related to the on-adjustment is not displayed on the second customization guidance screen.

Next, FIG. 62 is a flowchart of the customization executing display control process according to the subroutine of step 5300 in FIG. 59. First, in step 5302, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the light amount adjustment screen is being displayed. In the case of Yes in step 5302, in step 5304, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the up / down buttons of the cross key SB-2 have been operated. In the case of Yes in step 5304, in step 5306, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S changes the selected light amount level based on the operation of the cross key SB-2, and executes lighting in the confirmation lighting pattern. , Step 5320. In the present embodiment, when adjusting the light intensity level,
(1) When the light intensity level is selected with the cross key SB-2, it lights up with the confirmation lighting pattern corresponding to the selected light intensity level. (2) When the light intensity level is determined by the sub input button SB, the light intensity level is determined. A confirmation notification display for notifying which light amount level has been determined is displayed in the display area SG10 (sound is output).
It is configured as described above.

If No in step 5302, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 5308 whether or not the volume control screen is being displayed. In the case of Yes in step 5308, in step 5310, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2 have been operated. In the case of Yes in step 5310, in step 5312, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S changes the selected volume level and outputs a confirmation sound based on the operation of the cross key SB-2, and in step 5320. Transition. In the present embodiment, when adjusting the volume level,
(1) When the volume level is selected with the cross key SB-2, the confirmation sound corresponding to the selected volume level is output. (2) When the volume level is determined with the sub input button SB, the volume level A confirmation notification display for notifying which decision was made is displayed in the display area SG10 (sound is output).
It is configured as described above. It should be noted that the configuration in which the above-mentioned volume control screen is always displayed (or is always displayed during the symbol stop display, the symbol variation display, etc.) may be applied without outputting the above confirmation sound.

If No in step 5308, in step 5314, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the customization execution screen is being displayed. In the case of Yes in step 5314, in step 5316, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the up / down / left / right buttons of the cross key SB-2 have been operated. In the case of Yes in step 5316, in step 5318, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S switches the notice of the change target based on the operation of the cross key SB-2, and proceeds to step 5318-1. On the other hand, if No in step 5316, the process proceeds to step 5318-1. Next, in step 5318-1, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-input button SB is operated. In the case of Yes in step 5318-1, in step 5318-2, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2 are operated. In the case of Yes in step 5318-2, in step 5318-3, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S switches the frequency of the target advance notice. Next, in step 5318-4, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-input button SB is operated. In step 5318-4, in the case of Yes, in step 5318-5, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the selected advance notice frequency, erases the customization screen, and proceeds to step 5318-6. On the other hand, if No in step 5318-1, step 5318-2, and step 5318-4, in step 5318-7, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a predetermined time (5 seconds) has elapsed. In the case of Yes in step 5318-7, in step 5318-8, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases the customization screen and proceeds to step 5318-6. On the other hand, if No in step 5314 and step 5318-7, the process proceeds to the next process.

Next, in step 5320, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-input button SB has been operated, in other words, whether or not the volume level and the light amount level have been determined. If Yes in step 5320, the process proceeds to step 5324. On the other hand, if No in step 5320, in step 5322, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the start of the customization screen display. In the case of Yes in step 5322, in step 5324, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the currently selected volume level and light intensity level, and then erases the customization screen. As described above, in the present embodiment, the gaming machine is used when a predetermined time (5 seconds) has elapsed without operating the sub-input button SB or operating the sub-input button SB in setting the volume level and the light amount level. It is configured to determine the customization setting, but is not limited to (1) detecting the operation of the launch handle D44, (2) the symbol change has started, and (3) the predetermined ball entry port (for example). , The game machine customization setting may be determined when the game ball enters the first main game start port A10). In addition, even if the decorative symbol symbol changes while the customization screen is displayed, the customization screen remains displayed (the customization screen is displayed on the front layer rather than the decorative symbol variation display), and the gaming machine customization is executed. It may be configured as possible.

Next, in step 5325, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S resets and starts the non-game period measurement timer (increment timer), and shifts to the next process (process of step 5500).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the display mode related to the game machine customization from the start of the non-game period (timing when the measurement of the non-game period measurement timer starts) is "non-game period measurement timer value = 0 seconds → "Start of non-game period" → "Non-game period measurement timer value = 5 seconds → Start of display of the first customization guidance screen, customization screen (customization in progress screen, light amount adjustment screen and volume adjustment screen are collectively referred to as a customization screen) ) "Start of transitionable period" → "Non-game period measurement timer value = 75 seconds → Start displaying the second customization guidance screen" → "Non-game period measurement timer value = 240 seconds → Start displaying the standby demo screen, customize screen "End of transitionable period"-> "Non-game period measurement timer value = 900 seconds-> Execute default setting, start displaying power saving screen", but it is not limited to this, for example, "Non-game period" Measurement timer value = 0 seconds → Start of non-game period "→" Non-game period measurement timer value = 5 seconds → Start of transitionable period of customization screen (screen display does not change) "→" Non-game period measurement timer value = 75 Seconds → Start displaying the second customization guidance screen, start lighting the lamps provided on the sub input button SB and cross key SB-2 ”→“ Non-game period measurement timer value = 240 seconds → Start displaying the standby demo screen, customize It may be configured to be "end of screen transitionable period"-> "non-game period measurement timer value = 900 seconds-> execute default setting and start displaying power saving screen". The start of the transitionable period of the customization screen means that the period in which the customization screen is displayed by operating the sub input button SB or the cross key SB-2 has started.

Next, FIG. 63 is an example of an image diagram of the customization guide screen according to the present embodiment. First, in the left part of the figure, when the first customization guidance screen or the second customization guidance screen is displayed on the effect display device SG, the player operates the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2. The display mode of the volume control setting screen displayed in the case is shown. Specifically, when the first customization guidance screen or the second customization guidance screen is displayed, when the player operates the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2, the volume control screen is displayed and the volume control screen is displayed. When the left button of the cross key SB-2 is pressed during the display of, the confirmation sound from the speaker D24 becomes smaller, and the lighting part (white part) of the volume display in the upper speaker schematic diagram decreases. (Indicating that the volume level becomes smaller), when the right button of SB-2 of the cross key is pressed, the confirmation sound from the speaker D24 becomes louder, and the volume display of the upper speaker schematic diagram is performed. The lighting portion (white portion) of is increasing (indicating that the volume level is increased), and the volume level being selected is determined by pressing the sub input button SB.

Next, the central part of the figure is displayed when the up / down button of the cross key SB-2 is operated when the first customization guidance screen or the second customization guidance screen is displayed on the effect display device SG. The display mode of the setting screen for adjusting the amount of light is shown. Specifically, when the player operates the up / down buttons of the cross key SB-2, the light amount adjustment screen is displayed, and the first customization guidance screen or the second customization guidance screen is displayed while the light amount adjustment screen is displayed. If the upper button of the cross key SB-2 is pressed, the petal-shaped lighting part displayed on the effect display device SG is in three stages of "0 → 6 → 12". When the number increases (indicating that the light intensity level increases) and the lower button of SB-2 of the cross key is pressed, the petal-shaped lighting part displayed on the effect display device SG is 12 It is configured to decrease in 3 steps of → 6 → 0 (indicating that the light level becomes smaller), and to be determined to the selected light level by pressing the sub input button SB. There is. Even if the cross key SB-2 is operated when the standby demo screen is displayed, the volume control screen and the light amount control screen are not displayed, but the volume level and the light amount level itself can be changed. In the figure, the display corresponding to the light intensity level is a petal-shaped display, and the lighting part is configured to increase in three stages of "0 → 6 → 12", but this is limited. Instead, the lighting portion may be configured to increase in three stages of "1 → 2 → 3", or three petal-shaped displays may be provided (the size of the display area is different, It may be configured to increase in three stages of "small → medium → large" (three large, medium, and small petals).

Next, the right part of the figure is displayed when the sub input button SB is operated while the first customization guidance screen, the second customization guidance screen, or the standby demo screen is displayed on the effect display device SG. It shows the display mode of the screen during customization. Specifically, when the player operates the sub input button SB, the customization screen (notice customization screen) is displayed, and when the up / down / left / right buttons of the cross key SB-2 are pressed on the customization screen, the cursor moves and the sub input button is displayed. By pressing the SB, the notice in which the cursor is located is selected (transitions to the screen for changing the occurrence frequency of the notice in which the cursor is located).

Next, FIG. 64 is a transition diagram showing in detail the flow of customization on the right side of FIG. 63. First, the number of holds is 0 and the fluctuation is stopped. Next, since the predetermined time has elapsed, the first customization guidance screen is displayed.

Next, since the sub-input button SB was operated while the first customization guidance screen was being displayed, the customization screen (notice customization screen) is displayed. The cursor is moved by operating the up / down / left / right buttons of the cross key SB-2, and by operating the sub input button SB, it is possible to change the frequency of occurrence of the notice in which the cursor is located. Here, the fox notice (the fox notice and the fox notice for each color will be described later) is selected.

Next, a screen that allows you to set the frequency of occurrence of the fox notice is displayed, and you can select from 1 (frequency of occurrence: low) to 5 (frequency of occurrence: high) by operating the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2. (The cursor moves), and the setting is completed by operating the sub input button SB (the frequency of occurrence of the fox notice is determined by the frequency of occurrence where the cursor is located). ing. The frequency of occurrence is configured to change by about 20% per step.

Next, when the setting is completed, the screen returns to the screen in which the fluctuation is stopped, and the characters "Fox notice custom in progress" are displayed on the effect display device SG. If a predetermined time has elapsed without proceeding with the game from the completion of the setting, the first customization guidance screen may be displayed.

Next, although the fluctuation has started, the characters "Fox notice custom in progress" are displayed on the staging display device SG at this time as well.

Next, the fluctuation has evolved into Super Reach, and when it evolves into Super Reach, the words "Fox notice custom in progress" have been erased.

(Supplementary notice customization)
The display priority of displaying the customization status currently being set (here, the characters "fox notice custom in progress") on the effect display device SG is low. Specifically, the display priority is as follows: 2nd decorative symbol (sub-decorative symbol)> 1st reserved sub-display> 1st decorative symbol (main decorative symbol)> 1st reserved display> relevant change suggestion display>notice> custom status Is displayed.

It is preferable that the notices are not displayed in duplicate at the display position of the custom situation, but the notices may be displayed in duplicate. Further, it is preferable that the first decorative symbol is not displayed in duplicate, but it may be configured so as to be displayed in duplicate. As a configuration that is displayed in duplicate, for example, it may overlap with the display of the custom status during the variable display of the first decorative symbol, but it overlaps with the display of the custom status during the stop display of the first decorative symbol. It may be configured not to.

In the notice customization, only the frequency of occurrence of the customized notice and the display pattern (for example, in the case of customization in which the display pattern can be selected from A pattern, B pattern, and C pattern) are changed, and the display is not related to the customized notice. Will not change. For example, when the frequency of occurrence of the look-ahead effect is changed, the background image is not changed or the character image is not changed.

Notice customization can be customized individually for multiple notices. For example, the look-ahead effect, the next notice, and the white fox notice can be customized respectively.

It is preferable that the customization in the normal state (non-probability variable gaming state) is configured so as not to be affected in the probabilistic variable gaming state. For example, even if the "normal notice" is customized in the normal state, it is not applied in the probability fluctuation game state. Therefore, the advance notice customization may be configured so that the advance notice in the normal state and the probability change game state can be customized at all times, or the advance notice in the normal state can be customized in the normal state, and in the probability change game state. It may be configured so that the advance notice at the time of the probability fluctuation game state can be customized. In addition, the advance notice is customized in the normal state, and then the advance notice is customized in the case of the probability fluctuation game state (when the game state shifts) or in the probability change game state, and then in the normal state. If becomes, the setting of the advance notice customization may be canceled (returned to the default).

(Example of change of notice customization)
The advance notice customization is configured so that the setting continues until the power is turned off, but the advance notice customization is not limited to this, and the duration of the advance notice customization is until the predetermined time (for example, 60 minutes) elapses, until the start of the standby demo screen, and the game. It may be until the state changes (when the continuation period elapses, the advance notice customization setting is canceled). In addition, after a certain period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed in the variable stop state, "Do you want to cancel the current kitization setting?", "Yes", and "No" are displayed on the effect display device SG, and the sub input button SB and When "Yes" is selected by operating the cross key SB-2, the advance notice customization may be canceled.

In addition to the pre-reading effect and normal advance notice (notices that occur mainly before reach, such as step-up notices and dialogue notices) shown in this figure, the custom targets for notice customization are the three major effects (mainly with the model concerned). It may be three of the high-expectation effects).

In addition, custom notices that may occur at specific times (for example, during super reach) may be collectively enabled (for example, "notice during super reach" etc.), and notices that may occur multiple times. It may be possible to customize all of the above (for example, "Multiple occurrence notice" is displayed).

In addition, a specific notice (for example, a notice that confirms a big hit such as a premier notice) may be excluded from the custom target. In addition, it is possible to customize the premier notice, and if there is a customization that increases the frequency of occurrence of the premier notice, not only the pattern that increases the frequency of occurrence of all premier notices, but also the premier notice with an extremely low probability of occurrence. It is also possible to keep the frequency of occurrence unchanged. In other words, even if the production that occurs at 1 / 100,000 is doubled at 1 / 50,000, the player cannot experience the premiere notice, so it is difficult for the player to experience it. It is preferable to exclude the premier notice, which has an extremely low probability of occurrence, from the custom target.

In a gaming machine having a setting (setting value), it is preferable to configure the gaming machine to have the same or almost the same ratio of occurrence frequencies that are changed when customization is executed for a certain notice at different setting values. .. For example, in the case of customizing a red fox, which is a notice that the probability of occurrence (frequency of occurrence) is different for each set value, the frequency of occurrence of red fox is unlikely to occur in setting 1 (low setting), and setting 3 (high setting). (Setting) is configured to be easy to occur, and if the frequency of occurrence is designed based on the frequency of occurrence 5, and the frequency of occurrence is changed from "frequency of occurrence: 5" to "frequency of occurrence: 4" by customization, the setting is made. In setting 1, it is reduced by 20% from the occurrence frequency of "occurrence frequency: 5" in setting 1, and in setting 3, it is reduced by 20% from the occurrence frequency of "occurrence frequency: 5" in setting 3. As described above, it is preferable that the one-step change rate (20%) of the occurrence frequency is common regardless of the set value. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing the set value by setting the advance notice customization.

Further, as shown in FIG. 65, the denominator of the occurrence probability of the red fox in the settings 1 to 3 for each stage of the occurrence frequency may be different by a certain number of minutes. Specifically, the probability of red fox occurrence at the occurrence frequency 1 is set 1: 1/500, setting 2: 1/490, setting 3: 1/480, and the size of the denominator is different by 10. The probability of red fox occurrence at the occurrence frequency 2 is set 1: 1/400, setting 2: 1/390, setting 3: 1/380, and the size of the denominator differs by 10. The probability of red fox occurrence at the occurrence frequency 3 is set 1: 1/300, setting 2: 1/290, setting 3: 1/280, and the size of the denominator is different by 10. The probability of red fox occurrence at the occurrence frequency 4 is set 1: 1/200, setting 2: 1/190, setting 3: 1/180, and the size of the denominator differs by 10. The probability of red fox occurrence at the occurrence frequency 5 is set 1/100, setting 2: 1/90, and setting 3: 1/80, and the size of the denominator differs by 10.

As described above, the size of the denominator differs by 10 between the setting 1 and the setting 2 at any stage of the occurrence frequency, and the size of the denominator differs by 10 between the setting 2 and the setting 3.

However, in the occurrence frequency 1, the difference between the probability of occurrence of the red fox in setting 1 and the probability of occurrence of the red fox in setting 2 and setting 3 is up to 4%, and it is difficult to experience the setting difference. However, at the occurrence frequency 5, the difference between the probability of occurrence of the red fox in setting 1 and the probability of occurrence of the red fox in setting 2 and setting 3 is up to 20%, making it easy to experience the setting difference. It has become. Therefore, the player needs to estimate the set value from the occurrence probability of the red fox for each stage of the occurrence frequency, but it is advantageous to set the occurrence frequency to 5 in estimating the set value.

Since the player wants the warning to occur with a probability based on the customized frequency of occurrence, the probability of occurrence at a low frequency of occurrence at a high setting value (for example, the frequency of occurrence 1 of setting 3) and the frequency of occurrence at a low setting value are high. It is preferable to configure the probability of occurrence in (for example, the frequency of occurrence 2 of setting 1) to differ within a perceptible range, and the probability of occurrence in a low frequency of occurrence in a high setting value (for example, the probability of occurrence 1 in setting 3). It is not desirable that the probability of occurrence at a high frequency of occurrence at a low setting value (for example, the probability of occurrence 2 of setting 1) is close to or the same.

When it is difficult to guess the set value, the probability of occurrence at a low frequency of occurrence at a high setting value (for example, the frequency of occurrence of setting 3) and the frequency of occurrence at a low frequency of setting (for example, the frequency of occurrence of setting 1) are high. It is effective to make the probability of occurrence in 2) close or the same.

In the present embodiment, the advance notice customization is possible even during the fluctuation, and this configuration will be described with reference to FIG. 66.

First, it is currently changing, and the fox notice is being customized, and the frequency of occurrence of the fox notice is set to "5".

Next, the left button of the cross key SB-2 is operated, and the frequency of occurrence of the fox notice is changed to "4".

Next, the customizable period ends when 5 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation, and the character display of "fox notice 4" is erased.

In this fluctuation, the state of customization set at the start of the fluctuation is maintained, and the customization changed during the fluctuation becomes effective from the next fluctuation.

Further, in the customization during fluctuation, not only the occurrence frequency of the notice for which customization has already been set can be changed, but also the occurrence frequency can be changed during the change if the notice is customizable.

Specifically, the customizable notice is changed by operating the up and down buttons of the cross key SB-2, and the frequency of occurrence is changed by operating the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2.

With this configuration, it is possible to customize the frequency of occurrence of advance notices at the timing desired by the player without interrupting the game and waiting until the variable stop state.

Next, FIG. 67 is a flowchart of the in-game customization control process according to the subroutine of step 5350 in FIG. 59. First, in step 5364, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the operation of the up / down buttons of the cross key SB-2 has been detected. In the case of Yes in step 5364, in step 5366, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S changes the notice for customizing based on the operation of the cross key SB-2, and proceeds to the next process. On the other hand, if No in step 5364, in step 5368, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the operation of the left and right buttons of the cross key SB-2 is detected. In the case of Yes in step 5368, in step 5370, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S adjusts the frequency of occurrence based on the operation of the cross key SB-2, and proceeds to the next process. As described above, in the present embodiment, the advance notice can be customized by operating the cross key SB-2 even when it is not in the non-gaming period (during fluctuation). Specifically, the cross key SB-2 is configured. The up and down buttons of the above change the notice, the right button of the cross key SB-2 increases the frequency of occurrence by one step, and the left button of the cross key SB-2 decreases the frequency of occurrence by one step.

It should be noted that the customization during the game (customization during the fluctuation) is possible only in the normal state, and may be configured to be impossible in the probability fluctuation game state, or even if it is impossible during the execution of the big hit or the small hit. good.

It should be noted that, as in the customization of the occurrence probability of the red fox described above, it is possible for the player to change the occurrence probability (occurrence frequency) of the notice in which the occurrence probability differs depending on the set value by changing the occurrence frequency. While it is easier to guess the setting, there is a concern that the degree of advantage between players will change depending on the presence or absence of knowledge. Therefore, for notices having different occurrence probabilities (occurrence frequencies) for each set value, the occurrence frequency may be customized so that the occurrence frequency cannot be changed (not included in the change target).

Next, FIG. 68 is a flowchart of the pending information management process according to the subroutine of step 5500 in FIG. First, in step 5502, whether or not the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has received a command related to the occurrence of a new hold (hold information related to the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol) from the main control board M side. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 5502, in step 5504, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is set to the drawing hold counter (in this example, a maximum of 4 for the first main game and a maximum of 4 for the second main game). 1 ”is added. Next, in step 5506, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S issues a command related to the new hold success / failure result and the stop symbol information transmitted from the main control board M side to the drawing hold information temporary storage area (sub-control board S). Temporarily store in the area for temporarily storing information related to the hold on the side). Next, in step 5508, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stores the hold information (particularly, the variation mode group, etc.) in the drawing hold information temporary storage area based on the hold generation command transmitted from the main control board M side. Temporarily memorize. If the information regarding the hit / fail result, the stop symbol, and the variation mode group is not transmitted from the main control board M side, the information is not temporarily stored in the reserved information temporary storage area in step 5506 or step 5508. It will be. Next, in step 5509, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the new hold is a hold on the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 5509, in step 5550, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the first main game look-ahead determination process described later, and proceeds to step 5510. Next, in step 5510, whether or not the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has information that the trigger hold is added to the new hold (added in the process of step 5570), in other words, It is determined whether or not the new hold is a trigger hold. In the present embodiment, information indicating that the hold is a trigger hold is added to the hold that is won in the look-ahead lottery. In the case of Yes in step 5510, in step 5650, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the look-ahead hold content determination process described later, and proceeds to step 5520. If No in step 5509 (when the new hold is a hold on the second main game side) or No in step 5510, the process proceeds to step 5520. If No in step 5509, in step 5509-1, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has the second main game look-ahead process (look-ahead determination process, look-ahead) for executing the look-ahead effect due to the fluctuation of the second main game side. Content determination processing, etc.) is performed, and the process moves to the next processing.

On the other hand, if No in step 5502, in step 5511, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the symbol variation display start instruction command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 5511, in step 5512, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S subtracts “1” from the drawing hold counter. Next, in step 5514, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S temporarily stores the reserved information related to the symbol variation (particularly, the hit / fail result, the stopped symbol information, the variable mode group, and the variable mode random number delimited information). Remove from the area and shift the remaining pending information. Next, in step 5515, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the variation suggestion display on the variation suggestion display unit SG14 in the same display mode as the display mode immediately before the digestion of the digested hold (the digestion). The display mode of the held hold is shifted and displayed as the change suggestion display). The variation suggestion display may be referred to as the variation suggestion image. It should be noted that the display mode immediately before the digestion of the digested hold is blue, and then the display mode of the change suggestion display is red when the hold is digested and the change suggestion display regarding the digested hold is displayed. It may be configured so that the display mode of the hold immediately before digestion and the display mode of the change suggestion display after the hold digestion can be different from each other. In such a configuration, it is preferable to configure the display mode of the variation suggestion display after the hold digestion to have a higher expectation of big hit than the display mode of the hold immediately before digestion. .. In addition, the display mode of the hold and the change suggestion display is "white-> blue-> red-> rainbow" from the one with the lowest expectation of big hit. Next, in step 5516, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the symbol content determination permission flag, and proceeds to step 5520. Even if No in step 5511, the process proceeds to step 2520.

Next, in step 5520, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is displayed on the effect display device SG (particularly, the first hold display unit SG12 and the second hold display unit SG13) with the same number of hold display images as the drawing hold counter value. Is displayed in the hold display mode (the hold display mode is white when the hold display mode does not change), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 5700).

Next, FIG. 69 is a flowchart of the first main game look-ahead determination process according to the subroutine of step 5550 in FIG. 68. As will be described later, the processes of steps 5554 to 5558 are the processes related to the prohibition condition of the look-ahead lottery, and the processes of steps 5560 to 5570 are the processes related to the look-ahead lottery.

First, in step 5554, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the current gaming state is a non-probability variable gaming state and a non-time shortening gaming state (low probability / low base). If Yes in step 5554, in step 5556, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not there is a trigger hold in the hold. In the case of Yes in step 5556, in step 5558, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not there is a hold that is a big hit in the hold before the new hold. In the case of Yes in step 5558, in step 5560, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the new hold is a hold that is a big hit. In the case of Yes in step 5560, in step 5560-1, it is determined whether or not the new hold is a fluctuation pattern (group 4) that raises the stage level. In the case of Yes in step 5560-1, in step 5562, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S raises the level of the winning stage with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/3), and whether or not there is a big hit in the later hold. A look-ahead lottery including a stage level-up (details will be described later) is executed, and the process proceeds to step 5568. On the other hand, if No in step 5560-1, in step 5562-1 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a look-ahead lottery that does not include the stage level-up to be won with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/3), and steps are taken. It shifts to the processing of 5568. Further, in the case of No (that is, hold that causes a loss) in step 5560, in step 5564, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the new hold is a fluctuation pattern (group 5) that raises the stage level. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 5564, in step 5566, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a look-ahead lottery including a stage level up to be won with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/10), and proceeds to the process of step 5568. On the other hand, if No in step 5564, in step 5566-1, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a look-ahead lottery that does not include the stage level-up to be won with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/10), and in step 5568. Move to processing.

On the other hand, if No in step 5554, in step 5554-2, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the current gaming state is a probability-variable gaming state and a time-shortening gaming state (high probability / high base state). To judge. In the case of Yes in step 5554-2, in step 5556-2, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the trigger hold does not exist in the hold. In the case of Yes in step 5556-2, in step 5558-2, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not there is a hold that is a big hit in the hold before the new hold. In the case of Yes in step 5558-2, in step 5560-2, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the new hold is a hold that is a big hit. In step 5572, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a look-ahead lottery to win with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/3), and proceeds to the process of step 5568.

Next, in step 5568, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the look-ahead lottery executed in the processes of step 5562, step 5562-1, step 5566, step 5566-1, and step 5571 has been won. In the case of Yes in step 5568, in step 5570, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S adds information to the effect that it is a "trigger hold" to the new hold that has won the look-ahead lottery, and performs the next process (step 5510). Process). Even when No in step 5556, step 5558, step 5568, step 5554-2, step 5556-2, step 5558-2, and step 5560-2, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 5510).

Next, FIG. 70 is a configuration diagram of a look-ahead lottery table in the look-ahead lottery of FIG. 69. In the pre-reading lottery table including the stage level up in the non-probability variable game state and the non-time reduction game, any one of IDs 0 to 2 is determined according to the lottery value appropriately distributed. Next, in the look-ahead lottery table without stage level up in the non-probability variable game state and the non-time reduction game, any one of IDs 0 to 3 is determined according to the lottery value appropriately distributed. In the look-ahead lottery table without the stage level-up, the stage level-up cannot be executed, and it is determined whether or not to execute other look-ahead effects (here, pending change and chance eye). The look-ahead lottery table shown in this example shows a limited number of types of look-ahead effects in order to simplify the explanation, but in reality, a wider variety of lottery is performed based on combinations with other effects. It is configured to determine the look-ahead effect to be executed from the result (ID).

In the look-ahead lottery table in the probability-variable game state and the time-shortening game, in order to determine whether or not the predetermined look-ahead effect can be executed, the look-ahead lottery is assigned according to the lottery values assigned as ID0: no look-ahead effect and ID1: with look-ahead effect. Is done.

Next, FIG. 71 is a flowchart of the look-ahead pending content determination process according to the subroutine of step 5650 in FIG. First, in step 5654, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the look-ahead effect is in the non-probability variable gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 5654, in step 5656, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the pending change has been won. In the case of Yes in step 5656, in step 5658, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the hold change scenario determination table based on the pass / fail result, and holds the trigger hold in multiple changes up to the trigger hold based on the number of hold at the time of occurrence. Determine a pending change scenario to change. On the other hand, if No in step 5656, the process proceeds to step 5660.

Next, in step 5660, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the chance eye (details of the lottery and effect for the chance eye will be described later) has been won. In the case of Yes in step 5660, in step 5662, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the chance eye scenario determination table based on the pass / fail result, and displays the chance eye scenario in a plurality of fluctuations until the trigger is held. To decide. On the other hand, if No in step 5660, the process proceeds to step 5664.

Next, in step 5664, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the stage level up (details of the lottery and effect for the stage level up will be described later) has been won. In the case of Yes in step 5660, in step 5662, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the stage level up determination table based on the pass / fail result, and stage level up to raise the stage level in a plurality of fluctuations until the trigger is held. Determine the scenario and move on to the next process. On the other hand, even if No in step 5664, the process proceeds to the next process.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 5654 (= probability fluctuation game state and time reduction game state), in step 5668, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect content according to the fluctuation mode (variation mode group), and then the next step. Move to the processing of. The details of the effect (pre-reading effect in the probability-variable game state and the time-shortened game state) will be described later.

Next, FIG. 72 is an example of a pending change scenario determination table. In the figure, the hold change scenario determination table (at the time of big hit) that is referred to when the trigger hold is a hold that is a big hit, and the hold change scenario determination table that is referred to when the trigger hold is a hold that is a loss (at the time of a big hit). (At the time of loss) and will be described in detail. The item "at the time of occurrence" is the hold display mode at the time of trigger hold occurrence, and the item "before 3 changes" is the hold display mode at the end of the symbol change before the 3 changes of the symbol change related to the trigger hold. The item "2 before change" is the hold display mode at the end of the symbol change before the change of the symbol related to the trigger hold, and the item "1 before the change" is the symbol before the change of the symbol change related to the trigger hold. It is a hold display mode at the end of the fluctuation. For example, when "3 before change" is "blue" and "2 before change" is "blue", the hold change is held as a holding change during the symbol change before 2 changes of the symbol change related to the trigger hold. When the effect of failing (change in display mode of hold) is executed and "3 before change" is "blue" and "2 before change" is "red", 2 of the symbol change related to the trigger hold is executed. It is configured to execute an effect that succeeds in the hold change (change in the display mode of the hold) during the symbol change before the change. The hold change scenario is drawn by a random number, and the hold change is executed in the middle of the symbol change (may be configured to hold change at the start of the symbol change). The display mode of the trigger hold is "blue → red → rainbow color" from the one with the lowest expectation of big hit, and when the display mode of the trigger hold changes, the display mode of the trigger hold is expected to be a big hit. It is configured to change to a high-degree display mode. In addition, since "rainbow color" is not selected as the display mode when the trigger hold is lost, it is roughly confirmed that the trigger hold will be a big hit when the display mode of the trigger hold is "rainbow color". Become a target. Here, when the hold change is executed in the situation where the display mode of the trigger hold is "red", the display mode of the trigger hold is rainbow color, so that the display mode of the trigger hold is "red". When the hold change fanning effect is executed in, the player has a feeling of expectation that the hold change fanning effect will succeed. In this example, the display mode of the hold is set to four types of "white", "blue", "red", and "rainbow color", but the display mode is not limited to this, and the number of types may be increased. However, the changing element may suggest that the hold has changed not by the color but by the shape and lighting / blinking. Further, as a display mode suggesting a future hold change, for example, a hold in the shape of a treasure box may be displayed, and then the treasure box may be opened to change the hold display mode after the change.

Next, FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 5700 in FIG. 58. First, in step 5702, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the symbol content determination permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 5702, in step 5704, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the symbol content determination permission flag. Next, in step 5706, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S uses the temporarily stored symbol information (stop symbol / variation mode related to the main game symbol) to stop the decorative symbol {for example, stop related to the main game symbol. If the symbol is a big hit symbol, it is doublet such as "7, 7, 7", and if it is a lost symbol, it is random, such as "1, 3, 5"} and the variation mode is determined and sub-control. Temporarily stored in the RAM area of the board S.

Next, in step 5300, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the effect content determination process described later. Next, in step 5714, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the symbol content determination flag and shifts to the next process (process of step 5800).

Next, FIG. 74 is a flowchart of the effect content determination process according to the subroutine of step 5300 of FIG. 73. First, in step 5308, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the trigger hold exists in the hold. In the case of Yes in step 5308, in step 5310, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect content related to the symbol variation based on the stop symbol of the decorative symbol and the variation mode, and the next process (process of step 5714). Move to.

On the other hand, if No in step 5308, in step 5312, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not to execute the fanning effect. In the case of Yes in step 5312, in step 5314, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect content related to the symbol variation as the hold change fanning effect, and also refers to the hold change fanning effect determination table. Based on the pending change fanning scenario, the effect mode of the pending change fanning effect related to the change is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 5714). If No in step 5312, in step 5316, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the execution timing of the pending change success effect, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, and the effect related to the symbol change. The content is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 5714).

Next, FIG. 75 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 5800 in FIG. 58. First, in step 5802, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the symbol content determination flag is on. If Yes in step 5802, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the symbol content determination flag in step 5804. Next, in step 5806, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the symbol changing flag. Next, in step 5809, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts the drawing variation time management timer and shifts to step 5810. Even if No in step 5802, the process proceeds to step 5810.

Next, in step 5810, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the symbol changing flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 5810, in step 5811, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S confirms the timer value of the drawing fluctuation time management timer. Next, in step 5812, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the variation start timing of the decorative symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 5812, in step 5814, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a variable display command of the decorative symbol (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 5999). , Step 5823.

On the other hand, if No in step 5812, in step 5816, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the temporary stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) of the decorative symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 5816, in step 5818, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a stop display command (temporary stop display command) for the decorative symbol (in the display command transmission control process in step 5999, the sub-sub control unit SS side. Is sent to), and the process proceeds to step 5823.

If No in step 5816, in step 5820, has the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reached the display timing of the preview image or the reach image based on the variation mode temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S? Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 5820, in step 5822, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets an image display command related to the preview image and the reach image (in the display command transmission control process of step 5999, the sub-sub control unit SS side is set. (Sent), and the process proceeds to step 5823. Even if No in step 5820, the process proceeds to step 5823. Next, in step 5823, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the timing of leveling up the stage has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 5823, in step 5824, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the level up of the stage, and proceeds to step 5830.

On the other hand, if No in step 5823, in step 5825, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the execution start timing of the pending change has been reached. Here, in this process, it is determined whether or not one of the hold change success effect and the hold change failure effect is a predetermined timing in the symbol variation to be executed. In the case of Yes in step 5825, in step 5826, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the hold change execution start flag (a flag that is turned on when the execution timing of the hold change success effect or the hold change failure effect is reached). do. Next, in step 5827, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the hold change execution start flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 5827, in step 6050, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the hold change execution process described later, and shifts to the process of step 5830. Even if No in step 5827, the process proceeds to step 5830. If No in step 5825, in step 5828, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the execution timing of the variation suggestion display change effect has been reached. Here, in this process, it is determined whether or not one of the variation suggestion display change success effect and the variation suggestion display change failure effect is a predetermined timing in the symbol variation to be executed. In the case of Yes in step 5828, in step 5829, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the variation suggestion display change effect, and shifts to the process of step 5830. Here, when the variation suggestion display change effect to be executed is the variation suggestion display change success effect, a character appears, the display mode of the variation suggestion display changes, and the variation suggestion display change effect to be executed is performed. In the case of the variation suggestion display change failure effect, a character appears and the display mode of the variation suggestion display does not change. It should be noted that the effect mode of the variation suggestion display change success effect is such that the display mode of the variation suggestion display changes at a predetermined timing during the execution of the symbol variation, and the sub input button SB or the like is used. It is configured so that the display mode of the variation suggestion display is changed without the operation of the operation member of the above. If No in step 5828, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 5840 whether or not the display timing of the chance eye has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 5840, in step 5841, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the display of the chance eye, and proceeds to the process of step 5830. Even if No in step 5840, the process proceeds to step 5840.

Next, in step 5830, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the main game symbol is stopped and displayed. In the case of Yes in step 5830, in step 5831, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a stop display command (confirmed display command) for the decorative symbol (transmits to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process in step 5999). Will be). Next, in step 5832, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the drawing variation time management timer and resets (zero clears) it. Next, in step 5834, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the symbol changing flag and shifts to the next process (process of step 5900). Even if No in step 5810 or 5830, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 5900).

Next, FIG. 76 is a flowchart of the pending change execution process according to the subroutine of step 6050 of FIG. First, in step 6052, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the pending change executing flag (the flag that is turned on at the timing when the pending change success effect or the pending change failure effect is set) is off. do. If Yes in step 6052, in step 6054, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the pending change executing flag. Next, in step 6056, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the character as a pending change fanning effect. Next, in step 6058, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays a button image prompting the operation of the sub-input button SB. Next, in step 6060, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts by setting a predetermined value (for example, 3 seconds) in the change effect timer (decrement timer), and proceeds to step 6062. Even if No in step 6052, the process proceeds to step 6062.

Next, in step 6062, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-input button SB has been operated. If Yes in step 6062, the process proceeds to step 6066. On the other hand, if No in step 6062, in step 6064, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the timer value of the change effect timer is 0. If Yes in step 6064, the process proceeds to step 6066. Next, in step 6066, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S changes the hold by the character in the case of the hold change success effect, or changes the character to the hold change in the case of the hold change failure effect. Perform a failing production. Next, in step 6068, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the pending change executing flag. Next, in step 6070, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the hold change effect execution start flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 5830). Even if No in step 6064, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 5830). As described above, in the present embodiment, the button image prompting the operation of the sub input button SB is displayed when the hold change is executed, and the sub input button SB is operated or operated while the button image is being displayed (3 seconds). When the display period of the button image ends (3 seconds have elapsed), the hold change is executed in the case of the hold change success effect. If the display period of the button image ends without operating the sub input button SB, the hold change may not be executed.

Next, FIG. 77 is a pending change execution image diagram in the present embodiment. First, the decorative symbols corresponding to the first main game symbol are displayed in a variable manner. In this example, the number of holds is three, and the trigger hold related to the hold change is the second hold (in other words, the symbol change related to the trigger hold is executed after the two changes of the symbol change. Will be). Further, the display mode of the trigger hold is "white".

Next, a character (in this example, a lion) is displayed as a hold change fanning effect, and a button image prompting the operation of the sub input button SB is displayed.

Next, if the sub-input button SB is not operated within a predetermined time (3 seconds in this example) after the character and button images are displayed, the character and button images disappear and the display mode of hold is changed. Does not change (the hold display mode remains "white").

On the other hand, if the sub-input button SB is operated within a predetermined time (3 seconds in this example) after the character and the button image are displayed, the hold change (success) or the hold change effect (success) is performed. Either is executed. When the hold change (success) is executed, the character changes the hold by touching the hold display related to the trigger hold, and the hold display mode changes from "white" to "red". .. When the hold change (failure) is executed, the effect that the lion sheds tears is executed as the effect that the character fails in the hold change, and the display mode of the hold does not change (the display mode of the hold remains "white"). Will be maintained).

Here, in the present embodiment, as the effect mode of the hold change, the hold change fanning effect and the operation of the sub input button SB via the operation of the sub input button SB (the effect including the effect of urging the operation of the sub input button SB). It has a hold change fanning effect that does not involve the operation of the sub input button SB (an effect that does not include an effect that encourages the operation of the sub input button SB), and does not generate a hold change fanning effect that does not involve the operation of the sub input button SB at the start of fluctuation. Even in such a case, since the effect of prompting the operation of the sub input button SB is suddenly executed during the fluctuation, the player can expect the pending change at a plurality of timings. In addition, by providing a plurality of effect modes related to the hold change, various effects can occur during the period from the occurrence of the hold to the start of the symbol change related to the hold, which makes the game more interesting. It will be possible to improve it further.

Next, FIG. 78 is a flowchart of the special game-related display control process according to the subroutine of step 5900 of FIG. First, in step 5902, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the special gaming flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 5902, in step 5904, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the special game start display instruction command has been received from the main side. If Yes in step 5904, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the special gaming flag in step 5912. Next, in step 5914, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command related to the jackpot start display, and proceeds to step 5916. On the other hand, even if No in step 5902, the process proceeds to step 5916.

Next, in step 5916, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command for sequentially displaying the number of rounds and the number of winnings. Next, in step 5926, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 5926, in step 5928, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command related to the jackpot end display on the effect display device SG (displays appropriately based on the type of jackpot). Next, in step 5930, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the special gaming flag and shifts to the next process (process of step 5999). Even if No in step 5904 or step 5926, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 5999).

<Game state transition diagram>
Next, the transition of the main gaming state in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 79.

First, in normal time (low probability / low base), the first special symbol (first main game symbol) becomes a big hit (big bonus or normal bonus), and high probability / high base (standby mode or some hits saves time). Mode), high probability or low probability / high base (time saving mode).

The big bonus is a big hit that wins in the battle production during the big hit and shifts to the standby mode which is a high probability / high base, and the normal bonus is a draw or defeat in the battle production during the big hit and is high. It is a big hit to shift to the time saving mode which is probability / high base or low probability / high base.

In the high base state, the distribution member FB of the auxiliary game electric accessory E10 is in the second mode during most of the period during which the auxiliary game electric accessory E10 is in the easy-to-enter state (opening), and the game ball is It is easy to enter the first open entry port N1, and when the game ball enters the first open entry port N1, the first non-electric accessory HD-1 is opened (see FIG. 26).

When a game ball enters the first non-electric accessory HD-1 (first main game start port A10-2), the first special symbol is started, so that the first special symbol (first main game symbol) is correct or not. A lottery will be held.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, in the normal time (low probability / low base), any big hit becomes a high base state after the end of the big hit, and even after the high base state is reached. , It will be in a gaming state where the winning / failing lottery mainly based on the first special symbol is performed.

Next, in the high probability / high base, when the big hit is won by the first special symbol and the big hit fluctuation starts, the game state is changed from the high base to the low base, and the game state becomes high probability / low base. (See steps 1419-1 to 1419-3 in FIG. 30).

Here, since the gaming machines in the present embodiment can be drawn in parallel, even if the first special symbol (sometimes referred to as the first main gaming symbol) is changing, the second special symbol (second special symbol) is available. Since it is possible to make a win / fail lottery and change by (sometimes referred to as a main game symbol), the game state will be changed to a win / fail lottery based on the second special symbol.

Specifically, in the low base, the distribution member FB of the auxiliary game electric accessory E10 is the first aspect during most of the period during the easy entry state (opening) of the auxiliary game electric accessory E10. (See FIG. 26), it is easy for the game ball to enter the second open entry port N2, and when the game ball enters the second open entry port N2, the second non-electric accessory HD-2 is released. Open.

When the game ball enters the second non-electric accessory HD-2 (second main game start port B10), the second special symbol is started, so that the winning / fail lottery is performed in the second special symbol (second main game symbol). Will be done.

In the high probability / low base (during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol), when the game ball enters the second main game start port B10, the second special symbol is changed and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is changed. Is configured so that a relatively short time (in this example, small hit: 1.5 seconds, loss: 1.5 seconds) can be easily selected (note that during the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol). The lottery result of the second special symbol that started to change is not a big hit).

Even if the game ball enters the second main game start port B10 with a low probability / low base, the fluctuation time at the time of a small hit and at the time of loss is long (240 seconds in this example). It is structured so that it will be difficult to continue to receive lottery. That is, in the high probability / high base state, when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol starts, the auxiliary game time reduction flag is turned off at the start of the fluctuation, and the opening mode of the auxiliary game electric accessory E10 changes, but the main game By maintaining the time saving flag (or changing to the main game time saving flag corresponding to the high probability / low base), the big hit of the first special symbol is being changed regarding the determination of the variation pattern related to the variation display of the second special symbol. It is configured so that short-term fluctuations can be easily selected.

With this configuration, on a high probability / low base, when the first special symbol continues to fluctuate in big hits, the winning / failing lottery (lottery that becomes a small hit or a loss) by the second special symbol is performed multiple times. It is configured to be possible.

As shown in the main game table 1 of FIG. 31, the second special symbol is configured to win a small hit (about 1 / 1.03), and is a second in a high probability / low base (rush mode). Since the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol at the time of small hit is set to a short time (1.5 seconds in this example), it is configured so that small hits occur frequently. (In addition, in FIG. 31, the probability of winning a big hit is shown as the second main game winning / losing lottery table, but in the high probability / low base state where the first special symbol is changing the big hit, the big hit. Even if the random number is in the range of the random number value, it is controlled so that the lottery result of the loss is obtained.)

In the small hit, the large winning opening for small hits (second large winning opening C20) is opened and closed in an open pattern of 1.8 seconds open → closed, and about 3 balls are entered during this period (the second game ball). It is configured to (if it continues to fire towards the grand prize opening C20). Therefore, it is configured so that 3 (balls) × 5 (prize balls) = 15 balls can be obtained by one small hit. (In addition, as shown in FIG. 1, the auxiliary game electric accessory E10, the first non-electric accessory HD-1, the second non-electric accessory HD-2, and the illustration are shown upstream of the second prize opening C20. In consideration of the fact that the number of game balls that can be reached is limited as shown in FIG. The design value may be changed as appropriate, such as setting the number of prize balls per hit to 15 and setting the entry of one ball (acquisition of 15 prize balls) as the design value in one small hit.)

That is, although the details will be described later, since the period of high probability / low base (rush mode) is determined by the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the longer the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the more. It is configured so that the period during which a ball can be obtained is extended by the small hit of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, in the high probability or low probability / high base (time saving mode), when the actually determined gaming state is the high probability / high base, the big hit is won by the first special symbol and the big hit fluctuation is started. At that time, it becomes a high probability / low base and enters the rush mode.

In the high probability or low probability / high base (time saving mode), when the actually determined gaming state is the high probability / high base and the predetermined time saving number (30 times or 60 times) is reached. The production mode shifts to the standby mode while the game state remains the high probability / high base state.

Further, in the high probability or low probability / high base (time saving mode), when the actually determined gaming state is the low probability / high base, the predetermined time saving number (30 times or 60 times) is reached. If so, it shifts to the normal time (low probability / low base).

In the rush mode, the small hit symbol stop period of the second special symbol (small hit start demo time 0.1 seconds + small hit opening time 1.8 seconds + small hit end demo time 0.1 seconds = 2) Second), in other words, during the operation of the special electric accessory that opens the second big winning opening C20 (during the small hit game), the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped, and the stop period of the small hit symbol. When is finished, the jackpot fluctuation is resumed.

Next, when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped, if the fluctuation of the second special symbol (missing fluctuation or small hit fluctuation) is changing, it is forcibly stopped at the losing symbol, and the jackpot of the first special symbol is reached. The jackpot production (round battle) is started.

If you win the jackpot production (round battle) in the jackpot of the first special symbol, you will shift to high probability / high base (standby mode), and if you lose in the jackpot production (round battle), you will have high probability or low probability / high base. Shift to (time saving mode).

With this configuration, the rush mode in which small hits occur frequently continues for the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, so that the duration of the rush mode does not depend on the jackpot probability, and a certain period can be guaranteed. It will be possible.

<Characteristics of fluctuation pattern>
Next, the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol in the high probability / high base, which is the above-mentioned high probability / low base (rush mode) period, will be described with reference to FIG. 33.

In the jackpot symbol α2 in the setting 3 in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation pattern random value is 0 to 255, the fluctuation mode A20 is selected and the fluctuation time is determined to be 30 seconds. The details will be described later, but the production of the rush mode is one set (hit).

When the variation pattern random value is 256 to 699, the variation mode A21 is selected and the variation time is determined to be 60 seconds. The production of rush mode will be 2 sets (hits).

When the variation pattern random value is 700 to 899, the variation mode A22 is selected and the variation time is determined to be 90 seconds. The production of rush mode will be 3 sets (hits).

When the variation pattern random value is 900 to 989, the variation mode A23 is selected and the variation time is determined to be 120 seconds. The production of rush mode will be 4 sets (hits).

When the variation pattern random value is 990 to 1023, the variation mode A24 is selected and the variation time is determined to be 150 seconds. The production of rush mode will be 5 sets (hits). In addition, the variation mode A24 (150 seconds, per 5 sets) definitely notifies that the jackpot symbol has a high probability of α2 during the jackpot fluctuation (it is definite to win the round battle during the jackpot game). It is configured so that it can be selected only in the case of).

Further, as the number of random values of the variation mode A20 in the big hit symbols α1, α2, and α3 indicates (when α1, the number is 500, when α2: 700, when α3: 256), the big hit ends. It can be understood that the fluctuation time of the variation mode A20 (variation time 30 seconds) is relatively easier to select when the probability becomes low later, and when the probability becomes low after the jackpot ends, the fluctuation time It can be said that it is configured so that short fluctuation patterns are relatively easy to be selected. In other words, it can be said that it is easier to select a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time when the probability is high after the end of the big hit.

Next, an example of the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern according to the set value will be described with reference to FIG. 34. Here, the lottery table for determining the variation mode of the settings 1 to 3 in the jackpot symbol α1 will be described.

First, in the lottery table for determining the variation mode of the jackpot symbol α1 in the setting 3, when the variation pattern random number value is 0 to 499, the variation mode A20 is selected and the variation time is determined to be 30 seconds.

When the variation pattern random value is 500 to 699, the variation mode A21 is selected and the variation time is determined to be 60 seconds.

When the variation pattern random value is 700 to 899, the variation mode A22 is selected and the variation time is determined to be 90 seconds.

When the variation pattern random value is 900 to 1023, the variation mode A23 is selected and the variation time is determined to be 120 seconds.

The variation mode A24 is not selected. (Although the jackpot symbol α1 has a high probability / high base state as the gaming state after the jackpot game, the effect mode shifts to the time saving mode, and the display on the effect is not the standby mode but the effect display for the time saving mode. In order to execute the effect of shifting to the standby mode at the 30th or 60th variation after the big hit game, which is suggested to be the end of the apparent time saving mode, the high probability state transition is definitely notified 5 To prevent the set eye from being executed.)

Next, in the lottery table for determining the variation mode of the jackpot symbol α1 in setting 2, when the variation pattern random number value is 0 to 599, the variation mode A20 is selected and the variation time is determined to be 30 seconds.

When the variation pattern random value is 600 to 699, the variation mode A21 is selected and the variation time is determined to be 60 seconds.

When the variation pattern random value is 700 to 899, the variation mode A22 is selected and the variation time is determined to be 90 seconds.

When the variation pattern random value is 900 to 1023, the variation mode A23 is selected and the variation time is determined to be 120 seconds.

The variation mode A24 is not selected.

Next, in the lottery table for determining the variation mode of the jackpot symbol α1 in setting 1, when the variation pattern random number value is 0 to 699, the variation mode A20 is selected and the variation time is determined to be 30 seconds.

When the variation pattern random value is 700 to 799, the variation mode A21 is selected and the variation time is determined to be 60 seconds.

When the variation pattern random value is 800 to 899, the variation mode A22 is selected and the variation time is determined to be 90 seconds.

When the variation pattern random value is 900 to 1023, the variation mode A23 is selected and the variation time is determined to be 120 seconds.

The variation mode A24 is not selected.

As described above, in the case of setting 1, the variation mode A20 having a short variation time is relatively easy to be selected, and in the case of setting 3, the variation mode A20 having a shorter variation time as compared with the setting 1 and the setting 2 Is relatively difficult to select.

That is, the higher the set value (high setting), the easier it is to select a variation mode (variation pattern) with a long fluctuation time, and the lower the set value (low setting), the shorter the fluctuation mode (variation pattern). Is configured to be relatively easy to select, so it is possible to solve the problem that the higher the setting is, the easier it is to get a big hit and the small hit frequent mode is easy to end in the conventional small hit frequent mode. It can be configured so that the profit in the small hit frequent occurrence mode becomes larger as the setting is made.

<High probability / low base (rush mode) fluctuation control>
Next, the fluctuation control in the high probability / low base will be described with reference to FIG. 80.

First, as described above, in the high probability / high base (standby mode), the big hit is won by the first special symbol, and the big hit fluctuation is started, so that the high probability / low base (rush mode) is started.

In the high probability / low base (rush mode), it becomes easy to enter the second main game start opening B10, and the second special symbol fluctuates frequently, resulting in a small hit (about 1 / 1.03).

In FIG. 80, the first change of the second special symbol is performed after entering the high probability / low base (rush mode). Since the first fluctuation is a small hit fluctuation, it stops in 1.5 seconds, and the large winning opening for small hits (second large winning opening C20) is open for 1.8 seconds. The period during which the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed (small hit start demo time 0.1 seconds + second big winning opening opening time 1.8 seconds + small hit end demo time 0.1 seconds = total 2 seconds) is the first. The jackpot fluctuation of the special symbol is interrupted, and when the period (2 seconds) in which the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed elapses, the next variation of the second special symbol becomes possible, and the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is also restarted.

Immediately after that, the next change of the second special symbol has started. The fluctuation is a loss, it stops in 1.5 seconds, and because it is a loss, the second big winning opening C20 is not opened and remains closed. At this time, the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol does not pause, and the fluctuation continues.

That is, when the second special symbol is a small hit, the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is paused, but when the second special symbol is lost, the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is not paused. ing. Therefore, the more the small hit is won in the second special symbol, the higher the probability / low base (rush mode) period (the period from the start of the fluctuation display of the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol to the switching to the stop display). It will be long.

<Number of balls won in rush mode>
Next, the number of balls won in the high probability / low base (rush mode) will be described.

As shown in FIG. 35, the fluctuation time of the small hit fluctuation pattern (variation mode B20) and the fluctuation time of the loss fluctuation pattern (variation mode b3) of the second special symbol in the high probability / low base (rush mode) are both 1.5. It is seconds.

Since the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol is interrupted during the small hit, the number of balls to be won in the high probability / low base (rush mode) can be calculated by the following formula.
[formula]
(1st special symbol big hit fluctuation time / small hit fluctuation time) x 1 small hit prize ball expectation x small hit winning probability

For example, if you apply it using the case where the first special symbol jackpot fluctuation time is 150 seconds,
(150 (seconds) /1.5 (seconds)) x {3 (number of balls entered) x 5 (number of prize balls of the second major winning opening C20)} x (1 / 1.03)
= 100 x 15 x 0.97 ...
≒ 1456 (pieces)
Therefore, when the first special symbol jackpot fluctuation time is 150 seconds, it is calculated that 1456 balls can be obtained in the high probability / low base (rush mode).

In this example, the number of balls to be won in one big hit is 10 (count) x 10 (round) x 15 (number of prize balls of the first big winning opening C10) = 1500 (pieces). In terms of design values, the number of balls obtained per big hit (1500) is configured to be larger than the maximum number of balls obtained by small hits (about 1456) in high probability / low base (rush mode). ing.

By configuring in this way, it is configured so that a maximum of about two big hits can be obtained by small hits and big hits in the rush mode, but the balls are obtained by frequent small hits. It is preferable that the number of balls obtained in the game state that can be played is smaller in design than the number of balls obtained in one big hit. In addition, in the above-mentioned calculation formula, after the fluctuation display which is the loss of the second special symbol, the stop display fixed time provided to show the player that the loss was caused is not taken into consideration in the calculation. The fixed time of the stop display at the time of loss is set to 0.5 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the loss fluctuation of the second special symbol in the high probability / low base state is set to 1.0 second. It may be designed so that the consumption amount during the rush mode is the same depending on the time.

<High probability / Low base (during rush mode) loss probability>
Next, the high probability / low base (during rush mode) loss probability will be described with reference to FIG. 31.

As described above, the present embodiment allows parallel lottery, but is configured so that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol do not become big hits at the same time.

Specifically, on a high probability / low base, the lottery is mainly performed on the first special symbol. When a big hit is won in the first special symbol, a big hit is selected in the winning / losing lottery in the second special symbol in which the lottery process is executed after the winning / losing lottery result of the first special symbol is regarded as a big hit. It will be forcibly rewritten later (note that if it is decided that the other special symbol will be a big hit, it may be configured to draw at a lottery table that does not win the big hit. Any method may be used as long as it can be controlled so that the fluctuations that become big hits are not executed at the same time in the design).

For example, when the probability of the second special symbol in setting 1 is high, the random number value 0 to 63499: small hit, the random number value 63500 to 65344: big hit, the random number value 65345 to 65535: loss, and the big hit is won in the first special symbol. Then, if the random number value 63500 to 65344: big hit is won, it is rewritten as a loss. That is, substantially, the random number value 0 to 63499: small hit, and the random number value 63500 to 65535: loss.

Similarly, when the probability of the second special symbol in setting 3 is high, the random number value 0 to 63499: small hit, the random number value 63500 to 65479: big hit, the random number value 65480 to 65535: loss, and the big hit is in the first special symbol. If you win, the random number value 63500 to 65479: big hit, if you win, it will be rewritten as a loss. That is, substantially, the random number value 0 to 63499: small hit, and the random number value 63500 to 65535: loss.

In other words, regardless of the set value, the random number value 63500 to 65535: Loss, but if it was originally in the range of a big hit, that is, because the first special symbol is a big hit, it is rewritten from a big hit to a loss. In this case, an effect suggesting the set value (for example, light emission of a predetermined lamp) may be performed so that the player can guess the set value.

With this configuration, the higher the setting, the larger the range in which the big hit is originally made, so that it is possible to easily generate an effect suggesting the set value. Furthermore, if it is limited to the case where the random value range that is originally a big hit is lost, the execution frequency of the effect suggesting the installation value in the rush mode is the same as the big hit probability in the normal time, and even in the high probability state, in the normal time. It is possible to set an effect that occurs with the same probability as the jackpot of, and it is possible to create an event that can occur with one probability according to the set value, straddling the high probability state and normal time, and even in the high probability state during normal time. It is possible to provide information useful for estimating the jackpot probability of (the number of executions of an effect suggesting a set value, which is information that substitutes for the number of jackpots in a normal time). As a modification, a notice suggesting the same setting value is executed not only in the range of the big hit but also in the loss fluctuation according to the random number in the range of the random number value 63500 to 65535 which is the loss regardless of the set value. You may.

<Opening pattern of electric accessory in low probability / high base and fluctuation time of special figure>
Next, the case where the first special symbol is a big hit during the low probability / high base will be described.

First, during the low probability / high base, the opening pattern of the auxiliary game electric accessory E10 is 0.2 seconds open → 1.6 seconds closed → 5.8 seconds open → closed (if necessary, the figure). 26).

If a big hit is won with the first special symbol during the low probability / high base, the high probability changes to the low base when the big hit fluctuation starts, so the probability becomes low / low base (from step 1419-1 in FIG. 30). See step 1419-3). On a low probability / low base, the opening pattern of the auxiliary game electric accessory E10 is 1.6 seconds open → 0.2 seconds closed → 0.2 seconds open → closed.

That is, it is possible to observe the opening pattern of the auxiliary game electric accessory E10 at a low probability / high base and grasp that the opening pattern of the auxiliary game electric accessory E10 has become a low probability / low base at the timing when the opening pattern is changed. Yes, it is possible to know that the jackpot was won.

Further, since the effect display device SG is configured to display "right-handed" when the base is high, it is possible to grasp whether or not the jackpot is won even in the display. In other words, if you win a big hit with the first special symbol on a low probability / high base and the probability is low / low base, the display of "right-handed" is erased or "please left-handed" is displayed. Will be done.

Therefore, when the first special symbol becomes a big hit on a low probability / high base, it is interesting to the player to perform an effect of inciting the success or failure in the long fluctuation pattern (variation mode in which the fluctuation time is long). May not be very connected.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the jackpot variation pattern (variation mode A10) of the first special symbol in the low probability / high base is set to a short time (3 seconds) so that the jackpot game can be started immediately, and the auxiliary game is configured. It is not necessary to bother to observe the opening pattern of the electric accessory E10 and the display of "right-handed".

In addition, even if a big hit is won in the first special symbol on a low probability / high base, the display of "right-handed" may be continued, or "please left-handed" may not be displayed. ..

The CPUMC of the main control board M indicates whether to hit left or right (for example, if a predetermined LED is lit, it should be right-handed. When it is off, it indicates that you should hit left), and you should always hit left during normal times (for example, when the main game probability change flag, auxiliary game time reduction flag, and special game execution flag are all off). It is configured to suggest that there should always be right-handed except during normal times (eg, when at least one of the main game probability change flag, auxiliary game time saving flag, and special game execution flag is on). Is appropriate.

<High probability / high base (standby mode) display screen>
Next, a high-probability / high-base (standby mode) display screen will be described with reference to the upper diagram of FIG.

In the high probability / high base (standby mode), the staging display device SG has
1. 1. 1st special symbol Resident decorative symbol (sub-decorative symbol) ⇒ Lower left side of LCD screen 2. 2nd special symbol Resident decorative symbol (sub-decorative symbol) ⇒ Lower left side of LCD screen 3. 1st special symbol hold display ⇒ Middle right side of LCD screen 4. 2nd special symbol hold display ⇒ Middle right side of LCD screen 5. Right-handed instruction display ⇒ Upper right side of LCD screen 6. Production mode display ⇒ Upper left side of the LCD screen 7. 1st special design Decorative design (main decorative design) ⇒ Approximately the center of the LCD screen 8. Staging meter A ⇒ Lower right side of LCD screen 9. Display of cumulative number of balls won ⇒ Lower right side of LCD screen 10. Display of the number of consecutive villas ⇒ Upper center of LCD screen 11. Big hit result icon (total of big hit balls + rush mode balls) ⇒ The items added from the left to the right are displayed in the middle of the LCD screen.

The first special symbol resident decorative symbol (sub-decorative symbol) is a decorative symbol that is always displayed among the decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal screen while the first special symbol is changing or stopped. The second special symbol resident decorative symbol is a decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal screen while the second special symbol is changing or stopped, and is a decorative symbol that is always displayed. The first special symbol hold display is a display of the number of holds of the first special symbol displayed on the liquid crystal screen. The second special symbol hold display is a display of the number of holds of the second special symbol displayed on the liquid crystal screen. The right-handed instruction display is a display on a high base that indicates to the player the position where the game ball should be launched. The effect mode display is a display indicating the effect mode in which the person is staying. The first special symbol decorative symbol (main decorative symbol) is a decorative symbol displayed on the LCD screen while the first special symbol is changing or stopped so that the player can easily recognize it. be. The staging meter A is a display for suggesting the number of sets (= jackpot fluctuation time) in the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, although the details will be described later. The cumulative number of balls acquired is a display of the total number of balls acquired during the consecutive villas, and the total number of balls acquired in the jackpot and the number of balls acquired in the rush mode is displayed. The number of consecutive villas is displayed to indicate the number of consecutive big hits (number of consecutive villas). The jackpot result icon displays the total number of balls obtained for each jackpot and one rush mode, with one jackpot and one rush mode as one unit.

The display screen of the standby mode A is displayed until the jackpot fluctuation starts in the first special symbol. More specifically, the jackpot fluctuation was started in the first special symbol, and a specific symbol (eg, "rush mode") was described in the main decorative symbol area of the effect display device SG or in the substantially center of the effect display device SG. The display screen of the standby mode A is displayed until the symbol) is displayed.

That is, the display of the specific symbol is an opportunity to shift to the display screen of the rush mode, and the specific symbol is configured to be displayed about 6 seconds after the start of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol.

The specific symbol is displayed in the display area of "7. 1st special symbol decorative symbol (main decorative symbol)" or substantially in the center of the screen, and is displayed in "1. 1st special symbol resident decorative symbol (sub-decorative symbol)". Even in the display area, the specific symbol is displayed by shaking.

In the display area of "1. 1st special symbol resident decorative symbol (sub-decorative symbol)", the specific symbol is not displayed, and "7. 1st special symbol decorative symbol (main decorative symbol)" is configured. When a specific symbol is displayed in the display area of ")" or in the substantially center of the screen, the variable display is continuously displayed in the display area of "1. 1st special symbol resident decorative symbol (sub-decorative symbol)". It may be configured as follows.

Further, the effect displayed in accordance with the display of the specific symbol may be configured to suggest whether or not the big hit is a probabilistic hit. For example, the probability variation expectation may be increased in the order of blue effect ⇒ green effect ⇒ red effect.

<High probability / low base (rush mode A) display screen>
Next, a high-probability / low-base (rush mode A) display screen will be described with reference to the middle diagram of FIG. The rush mode includes a rush mode A and a rush mode B, and the player can select the rush mode by operating the sub input button SB and / or the cross key SB-2. In addition, the effect mode selection of the rush mode can be selected due to the appearance of an effect that can be selected when the big hit game that will enter the standby mode is being executed (for example, the big hit end demo period). .. Although not shown, in the standby mode when the rush mode B is selected, the staging meter A in the standby mode A is replaced with the staging meter B and the lamp image shown in the lower figure, and the mode is adjusted. The background effect image is displayed.

In the high probability / low base (rush mode A), the staging display device SG has
1. 1. 1st special symbol Resident decorative symbol (sub-decorative symbol) ⇒ Lower left side of LCD screen 2. 2nd special symbol Resident decorative symbol (sub-decorative symbol) ⇒ Lower left side of LCD screen 3. 1st special symbol hold display ⇒ Middle right side of LCD screen 4. 2nd special symbol hold display ⇒ Middle right side of LCD screen 5. Right-handed instruction display ⇒ Upper right side of LCD screen 6. Production mode display ⇒ Upper left side of the LCD screen 7. 2nd special design Decorative design (main decorative design) ⇒Slightly above the center lower part of the LCD screen 8. Staging meter A ⇒ Lower right side of LCD screen 9. Cumulative number of balls won ⇒ The lower right side of the LCD screen is displayed.

The second special symbol decorative symbol (main decorative symbol) is a decorative symbol displayed on the LCD screen while the second special symbol is changing or stopped so that the player can easily recognize it. be.

The effect in the rush mode is composed of 30 seconds per set (maximum 5 sets = 150 seconds), and is configured to execute a continuous fanning effect for each set. When executing the continuous fanning effect, "7. Second special symbol decorative symbol (main decorative symbol)" is not displayed, and the continuous fanning effect is focused on. In addition, "30 seconds" of one set is assumed to be 30 seconds in the elapsed time of the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol which is to shift to the rush mode, and the first special by the small hit of the second special symbol. When the fluctuation display of the symbol is interrupted (the subtraction of the timer that manages the fluctuation display time is interrupted), the timekeeping of "30 seconds" as one set of the rush mode is interrupted in the same manner as the fluctuation display of the first special symbol. Therefore, one set is a time exceeding "30 seconds" as a production time.

In addition, if it is displayed that the set will not continue in the continuous fanning effect (for example, the ally character loses in the continuous battle effect) and the fluctuation stops and it becomes a big hit, the decorative symbol of the first special symbol will be A specific symbol (a symbol in which the letter "R" indicating that the rush mode is in effect) is swaying and fluctuating is switched to a display mode indicating a big hit such as "777" and stopped and displayed.

In other words, if the rush mode continues, the rush mode display ⇒ continuous fanning effect ⇒ continuous fanning effect success display ⇒ rush mode display screen, and when the rush mode ends (the fluctuation display time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol). ⇒ Rush mode display ⇒ Continuous fanning effect ⇒ Continuous fanning effect failure display ⇒ Big hit display (“777” etc.) ⇒ Big hit game.

In addition, in the continuous fanning effect, the set may be in a special state (for example, invincible state of the ally character), and the ally character displayed in the rush mode display is displayed in the special state, so that the next continuous fanning effect is produced. It may be configured to indicate continuation in the continuous fanning effect, or it may be configured to indicate that the ally character displayed in the continuous fanning effect is continued in the continuous fanning effect by being displayed in a special state.

<Staging meter A>
Next, the specifications of the staging meter A will be described.

The staging meter A is a display used to suggest whether or not the jackpot of the first special symbol is a probabilistic jackpot during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol.

Five staging balls can be acquired on the staging meter A, and when the rush mode A is entered, the first staging ball is displayed in blue, and each time the set continues, the staging ball is acquired (of the staging ball). The color changes). That is, in the first set, the first effect ball turns blue, in the second set, the second effect ball turns yellow, and in the third set, the third effect ball turns green. In the 4th set, the 4th effect ball turns red, and in the 5th set, all the effect balls change to rainbow color.

In the present embodiment, the larger the number of sets (longer fluctuation time), the higher the ratio of the probability variation jackpot (see FIG. 33), so that the player has a large number of sets in the rush mode A. , It is possible to directly recognize that the probability change expectation is high every time the color of the production ball changes, and it is possible to expect a continuous villa.

Further, using the effect ball (the effect ball whose color has changed) acquired during the rush mode A, the probability change notification effect for notifying whether or not the probability change occurs during the big hit effect is performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 82, a button effect is generated in a predetermined round (for example, 9 rounds) of the jackpot effect, and it is notified whether or not the probability change occurs. First, a button image indicating that the button operation is valid is displayed. Next, the effect balls acquired during the rush mode A are aggregated in the button image. Next, depending on the degree of chance up of the button image (for example, suggesting the degree of chance up by the size and number of flames, or by displaying the type of the button image itself with a high-expectation effect button image). It suggests the possibility of successful production. In this way, the larger the number of acquired effect balls, the easier it is for the button image to have a higher chance, and the easier it is for the button effect to succeed.

In the look-ahead processing in the high probability / high base (standby mode A), if the jackpot fluctuation pattern exists in the first special symbol in the hold, the loss fluctuation before the fluctuation due to the jackpot fluctuation pattern starts. , The effect ball may be acquired according to the result of the preliminary determination regarding the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern in the hold. In this case, the continuation of the number of sets corresponding to the number of effect balls acquired by the time the rush mode A is started is deterministically suggested and notified in advance.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to grasp the minimum duration of the rush mode before the jackpot fluctuation actually starts, and the degree of expectation for the number of balls to be obtained by the small hit in the rush mode can be determined by the jackpot fluctuation. It can be increased even before the start.

Furthermore, if there are two jackpot holds for the same special symbol (for example, only the first special symbol), a special effect (for example, an extra bonus) is given from the start of the jackpot effect by the first jackpot. It is also possible to display and notify that the next big hit has been confirmed.

At this time, the second big hit hold is a big hit within the random number range that becomes a big hit regardless of whether the first big hit hold is a probability change, that is, within the random number range that becomes a big hit with a low probability. It is preferable to be a big hit. With this configuration, the game state after the jackpot related to the first jackpot hold is completed has a low probability, and the result of the winning / failing lottery related to the second jackpot hold is lost. The situation can be prevented.

Further, in this example, the color of the effect ball (notification image of the probability change expectation degree) is switched stepwise according to the number of sets, and 5 sets in which the probability change is finally confirmed after the big hit game. All the staging balls are configured to be rainbow-colored in the eyes, but as a modification, the game result in the rush mode (for example, the second big hit based on the small hit of the second special symbol) with respect to the image of the staging ball already acquired. It is executed by entering the game ball into the winning opening C20, executing the loss fluctuation of the second special symbol, entering the gate or entering the winning opening when the game ball flows down when hitting right). Even if you execute a production lottery that replaces the production ball with a higher one (or adds an effect to the production ball, etc.) so as to raise the expectation that the big hit fluctuation will become a probable change after the big hit. good. With this configuration, when the chance of button production that occurs in a predetermined round during a big hit is increased, the probability change expectation is determined not only by the number of production balls but also by the combination of the displayed production balls (or effect images). It is possible to make the difference, and even during the rush mode, it is possible to enhance the fun of the game by paying attention to whether or not the production ball has a chance to increase.

<High probability / low base (rush mode B) display screen>
Next, a high-probability / low-base (rush mode B) display screen will be described with reference to the lower diagram of FIG.

In the high probability / low base (rush mode B), the staging display device SG has
1. 1. 1st special symbol Resident decorative symbol (sub-decorative symbol) ⇒ Lower left side of LCD screen 2. 2nd special symbol Resident decorative symbol (sub-decorative symbol) ⇒ Lower left side of LCD screen 3. 1st special symbol hold display ⇒ Middle right side of LCD screen 4. 2nd special symbol hold display ⇒ Middle right side of LCD screen 5. Right-handed instruction display ⇒ Upper right side of LCD screen 6. Production mode display ⇒ Upper left side of the LCD screen 7. 2nd special design Decorative design (main decorative design) ⇒Slightly above the center lower part of the LCD screen 8. Staging meter B ⇒ Right upper to lower right side of LCD screen 9. Display of cumulative number of balls won ⇒ Lower right side of LCD screen 10. Lamp image ⇒ The upper right side of the LCD screen is displayed.

The staging meter B is a display for suggesting the number of sets (= jackpot fluctuation time) in the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol. The lamp image is a display indicating that the jackpot fluctuation is a probability variation jackpot by becoming a lighting image.

In the effect meter B, when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol starts in the high probability / high base (standby mode B) and the specific symbol is displayed, the charge effect of charging the meter is performed. In the charge effect, the meters are displayed as if they are accumulated from the bottom to the top, and one scale of the meter indicates one set, and it is configured to decrease the scale by one each time the set continues. There is. In addition, one meter is set as one set, and each time one meter is charged, a display indicating the number of charges such as "× 1" and "× 2" is displayed, and the number of "× ○" is decremented by 1 each time the set is continued. It may be configured to display a plurality of meters and erase one each time the set is continued. That is, the staging meter A is displayed every time the number of sets continues, while the staging meter B displays the number of sets that continue first.

When all the charged meters in the effect meter B are exhausted, a recharge effect (there is a failure pattern in which the meter is not charged) for recharging the meter may be enabled. Further, the specific symbol may be a symbol in which the specific symbol in the rush mode A and the specific symbol in the rush mode B are different, and when the specific symbol displayed in the main decorative symbol area or the substantially center of the effect display device SG is different. Also, the specific symbol displayed in the display area of the sub-decorative symbol is different between the rush mode A and the rush mode B.

Further, in the look-ahead processing in the high probability / high base (standby mode B), when the jackpot fluctuation pattern exists in the first special symbol hold, the jackpot fluctuation is performed before the fluctuation due to the jackpot fluctuation pattern is started. The meter may be configured to be chargeable according to the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern.

The effect ball acquired in the effect meter A is used in the jackpot effect, but the charged meter in the effect meter B is not used in the jackpot effect. That is, in the rush mode B, the effect meter B notifies the player of the expected degree of the winning prize ball in the rush mode, while the expected degree regarding the button effect during the big hit is the button effect during the big hit. It is difficult to estimate as a player, and it is difficult to estimate from the effect meter B whether or not it is a probabilistic jackpot (exception is when the effect meter B is full, or. When the situation continues for 5 sets due to recharge effect etc., it is definitely notified that the change is related to the probability change jackpot, so it can be estimated that the probability change is before the button effect during the jackpot. Become).

The lamp image is displayed not only during the charge effect after the display of the specific symbol in the jackpot fluctuation, but also during the charge before the start of the jackpot fluctuation, to the second big winning opening C20 based on the stop of the small hit symbol of the second special symbol in the rush mode. It is configured so that it can be a lighting image even during the big hit production when entering the ball. It should be noted that, during charging before the start of the jackpot fluctuation, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S can be probablely changed in the first special symbol hold by the pre-reading process, which can be a lighting image when the ball enters the second winning opening C20. When recognizing that there is a big hit, the lighting image can be a lighting image during the big hit production because this big hit is a probable variable big hit, and the player is urged to operate the sub input button SB during the big hit production. It may be the case that the operation of the sub-input button SB is performed at a predetermined timing that is not set.

<Returning power off during rush mode>
When the power is cut off during the high probability / low base (rush mode) and the power is restored, the game status information (high probability / low base) is sent from the CPU MC of the main control board M to the CPU SC of the sub control board S. Is transmitted, and the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is configured to return to the rush mode based on the received game state information (command indicating high probability / low base).

The rush mode after the power is turned off and restored is configured to return in the rush mode A, which is predetermined as the default rush mode.

Further, instead of the method of returning to the rush mode based on the received game state information, the variation pattern (small hit) of the second special symbol on a high probability / low base is transferred from the CPUMC of the main control board M to the CPUSC of the sub-control board S. Fluctuation pattern: Fluctuation mode B20, Loss Fluctuation pattern: Fluctuation start information or fluctuation stop information of the fluctuation mode b3) is transmitted, and the CPUSC of the sub-control board S receives the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol on a high probability / low base. It may be configured to return to the rush mode based on the fluctuation start information or the fluctuation stop information of (small hit variation pattern: variation mode B20, loss variation pattern: variation mode b3).

<Supplement / change example>
When the jackpot fluctuation starts in the high probability / high base, the high probability / low base is obtained, but the display screen of the standby mode is displayed on the effect display device SG until the specific symbol is displayed. At this time, even if the standby mode is displayed on the effect display device SG, since it has a high probability / low base, it is in a gaming state in which it is easy to obtain a ball output by a small hit.

At this time (when the standby mode is displayed with a high probability / low base), the balls obtained by small hits may be counted as the balls obtained during the rush mode, or the first Do not count as the balls that were acquired during the standby mode immediately after the start of the big hit fluctuation related to the special symbol, and only the balls that were acquired by the small hit after actually entering the rush mode are counted as the balls that were acquired during the rush mode. It may be configured to do so.

At this time (when the standby mode is displayed with a high probability / low base), if the payouts obtained by the small hit are counted as the payouts obtained during the rush mode, the payouts are actually due to the small hits. It is possible to count the exact number of balls that have been acquired since the game was in a game state where it is possible to acquire balls, and only the balls that were acquired by a small hit after actually entering the rush mode were acquired during the rush mode. When it is configured to be counted as a ball, it is possible to count the number of balls obtained in the apparent rush mode so as to be suitable for playability.

Even if the game shifts to the high probability / low base when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol starts in the high probability / high base (standby mode), it is already changing when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol starts. New on a high probability / low base unless after the second special symbol variation (small hit: variation mode B10, variation time 10 seconds, loss: variation mode b2, variation time 10 seconds) is completed. The lottery for the second special symbol will not be held.

That is, if the fluctuation of the second special symbol starts immediately before the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol starts, the second special started immediately before the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol starts for about 10.0 seconds. The symbol variation time (10 seconds) is at least in a state where small hits do not occur.

In the present embodiment, the specific symbol is displayed 6 seconds after the start of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, and the player is configured to enter the rush mode. Therefore, even if the player enters the rush mode, the previous one is about 4 seconds. Even if the game ball enters the second main game start port B10 based on the fluctuation, the lottery is not performed, so that the player may feel a sense of discomfort.

Therefore, when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started in the high probability / high base (standby mode), the specific symbol is displayed within 6 seconds after the start of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol. If the change of the symbol can be started, it shall be 6 seconds after the start of the big hit change of the first special symbol, and the change of the second special symbol cannot be started within 6 seconds after the start of the big hit change of the first special symbol. (If the remaining fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 6 seconds or more at the start of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol), the specific symbol is displayed at the end timing of the fluctuation of the second special symbol, and the rush mode is entered. It may be configured as follows. With this configuration, after the specific symbol is stopped and displayed, the effect indicating that the second special symbol becomes a small hit (for example, the main decorative symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small hit mode). It is configured so that the period until the occurrence of (such as things) does not become excessively slow, and the feeling of loss for the remaining time of the rush mode based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol that started the fluctuation before the start of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol I am trying to reduce it.

<Ratio of game balls flowing down>
Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the ratio of the flow of the game ball when hitting to the right will be described. Here, for each game state, a configuration designed assuming how many balls should flow on which route when 100 game balls are launched is shown. Although not shown, the fall route of the game ball is divided by opening and closing of each electric accessory, nails, and the like.

First, the high base (standby mode / time saving mode) time of (a) will be described.

First, when hitting to the right, all (100 balls) of the game balls reach above the auxiliary game start opening H10.

Next, 99 of them head toward the auxiliary game start port H10, and one ball heads in a direction different from that of the auxiliary game start port H10.

Of the game balls that have passed through the auxiliary game start port H10 (here, the gate), since the base is high and it is easy to enter the auxiliary game electric accessory E10, 50 balls go to the auxiliary game electric accessory E10. Heading toward the ball, 49 balls do not enter the auxiliary game electric accessory E10, but join the fall route of one ball that did not go to the auxiliary game start port H10 (enter the auxiliary game electric accessory E10). There are a total of 50 game balls that are not played). In the high base state, most of the game balls that have entered the auxiliary game electric accessory E10 are configured to enter the first open entrance N1 by the action of the distribution device FS, but in rare cases, the first 2 Also enter the open ball opening N2.

Of the 50 merged balls, 19 are heading toward the upper out port D36-2, 30 are heading toward the first non-electric accessory HD-1, and one is in the other direction. Head to. When the game ball enters the first non-electric accessory HD-1, the game ball shifts to the closed state due to the weight of the game ball, and the first open entry port N1 in the auxiliary game electric accessory E10 is again used as the game ball. If the ball does not pass through, the closed state is maintained, so that most of the 30 game balls that have actually flowed down toward the first non-electric accessory HD-1 flow down further downstream.

The game ball that did not enter the first non-electric accessory HD-1 when the one ball heading in the other direction and the first non-electric accessory HD-1 is in the closed state is the second large winning opening C20. (Large winning opening for small hits), 2nd non-electric accessory HD-2, 1st large winning opening C10 (Large winning opening for big hits). At this time, unless the second non-electric accessory HD-2 is in the open state and the second special winning opening C20 is in the open state (opening based on the small hit of the second special symbol) (FIGS. 83 (a) and (c). ) Indicates that the second major winning opening is closed), and the ball is entered into the lower out opening D36 without entering those entrances.

Next, the high probability / low base (rush mode) time of (b) will be described.

First, when hitting to the right, all (100 balls) of the game balls reach above the auxiliary game start opening H10.

Next, 99 of them head toward the auxiliary game start port H10, and one ball heads in a direction different from that of the auxiliary game start port H10.

Of the game balls that have passed through the auxiliary game start port H10 (here, the gate), since the base state is low, it is more difficult to enter the auxiliary game electric accessory E10 than in the high base state, and 20 balls are used. Heading toward the direction of entering the auxiliary game electric accessory E10, 79 balls do not enter the auxiliary game electric accessory E10 and join the fall route of one ball that did not go to the auxiliary game start port H10 (auxiliary game). A total of 80 game balls that do not enter the electric accessory). In the low base state, most of the game balls that have entered the auxiliary game electric accessory E10 are configured to enter the second open entrance N2 by the action of the distribution device FS, but in rare cases, the first 1 Also enter the open ball opening N1.

Of the 80 merging balls, 19 balls head toward entering the upper out port D36-2, and 61 balls head toward the other direction.

The 61 balls heading in the other directions head toward the direction in which 15 balls enter the second large winning opening C20 (large winning opening for small hits) (in FIG. 83 (b), the second large winning opening is open. 20 balls head toward entering the second non-electric accessory HD-2, and 26 balls enter the first big winning opening C10 (big winning opening). The ball will enter the lower out port D36 without doing anything. When the first non-electric accessory HD-1 is open, a part of the 61 balls heading in other directions will enter the first non-electric accessory HD-1. ..

Next, the big hit of (c) will be described.

First, when hitting to the right, all (100 balls) of the game balls reach above the auxiliary game start opening H10.

Next, 99 of them head toward the auxiliary game start port H10, and one ball heads in a direction different from that of the auxiliary game start port H10.

Of the game balls that have passed through the auxiliary game start port H10 (here, the gate), since it is in a low base state, it is difficult to enter the auxiliary game electric accessory E10, so 20 balls are the auxiliary game electric accessory E10. 79 balls head toward the direction of entering the ball, head toward the direction of not entering the auxiliary game electric accessory E10, and join the fall route of one ball that did not head toward the auxiliary game start port H10 (to the auxiliary game electric accessory). A total of 80 game balls heading toward those who do not enter).

Of the 80 balls that have merged, 19 balls head toward the upper out port D36-2, and 61 balls head toward the other direction.

The 61 balls heading for others head toward the direction of entering 20 balls into the second non-electric accessory HD-2 without entering the second large winning opening C20 (large winning opening for small hits), and further to the second. If the 1st big winning opening C10 is open, 41 balls will go toward the 1st big winning opening C10 (big winning opening), and if the 1st big winning opening C10 is closed, 41 balls will go. The ball will enter the lower out port D36. Although not shown, in normal times (low probability / low base), when hitting to the right, the ball flows down by the same route as during the big hit (while the first big winning opening C10 is closed).

<< Explanation of level-up staging (look-ahead staging / variable staging) >>
Next, a level-up effect, which is one of the effect modes of the gaming machine, will be described.

The level-up effect is an effect that can be executed in both a look-ahead effect (an effect that suggests whether or not an unchanged hold is correct) and the variable effect (an effect that suggests the appropriateness of a change that is changing). An example is an example of a configuration in which the level of a stage (also referred to as an effect stage, a mode, an effect mode, etc.) displayed on the effect display device SG is increased. It should be noted that, as the level goes up, moving to a higher level stage suggests that the expectation for big hits is increasing.

<Stage and stage level transition>
Next, the stage and the transition at the stage level will be described with reference to FIG. 84.

In this example, the stage of stage level 1 (Lv1) is 4 stages of stage A, stage B, stage C and stage D, and the stage of stage level 2 is 3 stages of stage AA, stage BB and stage CC, and stage level. As the stage of 3, one stage of stage XXX is provided.

The three stages A, B, and C at stage level 1 are the case where the CPUSC of the sub-control board S wins the stage change lottery executed with a predetermined probability for each change, or the same stage has a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example,). (20 fluctuations) If you stay, it is configured to move to a stage different from the stage you were staying at. It should be noted that stage D is a stage that shifts after the time saving mode ends and stays up to 15 variable stays, and after staying 15 variable stays in stage D, it is a lottery whether to shift to stage A, stage B, or stage C. Is determined by.

Stages A, B, and C are configured so that different notices can be executed for each stage, and further, a stage background image, a decorative pattern display mode (characters, numbers, etc.), a decorative symbol variation mode, and the like are also included. It is configured to be different for each stage. Examples of the notices that differ from stage to stage include normal notices (notices that occur mainly before reach, such as step-up notices and dialogue notices).

The three stages AA, stage BB, and stage CC in stage level 2 (Lv2) are provided as stages for leveling up from the corresponding stage level 1. Specifically, it is configured to be a stage AA that level up from stage A, a stage BB that level up from stage B or stage D, and a stage CC that level up from stage C. Therefore, unlike the three stages of stage A, stage B, and stage C of stage level 1, there is no transition to another stage of the same stage level.

Stages AA, BB, and CC are configured to execute the same advance notice as the stage before leveling up. For example, in stage A and stage AA, a common normal notice can be executed. Further, the display mode (characters, numbers, etc.) of the decorative design, the variation mode of the decorative design, and the like are configured in a common mode at the stage level 2. The stage background image is a background image that differs for each stage.

The stage A and the stage AA may have different stage background images, or may be configured so that they are the same stage background image and the character display (effect mode display) indicating the stay stage is at least different.

Stage XXX at stage level 3 (Lv3) is the highest level stage and is configured to be able to migrate from any stage.

It is preferable that the characters "Stage XXX" are displayed on the stage XXX so that it can be recognized that the stage XXX is different from any other stage. It should be noted that the same advance notice as in stage level 1 and stage level 2 may be executed, or different notices may be executed. Further, when the characters "stage XXX" are not displayed in the stage XXX, it is preferable to visually differentiate the stage XXX from other stages so that the player can visually recognize the stage XXX. Is.

When the same notices as those of stage level 1 and stage level 2 can be executed, the player can easily feel the expectation for the big hit by making the structure so that the notices of the same mode can be continuously generated. It can be configured. When the notice different from the stage level 1 and the stage level 2 can be executed, the player can easily recognize the notice that can occur only at the stage level 3 to raise the expectation of the big hit. It can be easily configured.

<Stage level up within 1 fluctuation>
Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the timing of stage level up within one variation will be described.

First, the timing of leveling up the stage during the period from the start of fluctuation to the tempai (reach) will be described.

First, when the fluctuation starts, the first timing at which the level of the stage can be raised is reached. At this time, if all the decorative symbols are changed to special symbols (for example, flame symbols) almost all at once, the level of the stage is raised. (Suddenly level up)

Next, we reach the second timing where we can start the level-up fanning effect of the stage. At this time, when a part of the decorative symbols (for example, the left symbol) changes to a special symbol, the stage level-up fanning effect starts. In addition, the stage level-up fanning effect also has a pattern that becomes successful after failing once. The level-up effect started at the second timing is continuous with the level-up fanning effect of the third timing, which will be described later.

Next, it reaches the third timing at which it is possible to start the level-up fanning effect of the stage. Also at this time, if a part of the decorative symbols (for example, the right symbol or the left symbol and the right symbol) changes to a special symbol depending on whether the level-up fanning effect at the second timing is executed or not. The stage level-up fanning effect (the effect of fanning whether or not the middle symbol changes to a special symbol) is started, and the stage level-up fanning effect is successful (the middle symbol also changes to a special symbol and all the symbols change to special symbols). ) And the level of the stage goes up. As an example of a series of failure patterns of level-up fanning effect from the 2nd timing to the 3rd timing, the left symbol became a special symbol at the 2nd timing, but the right symbol (and the middle symbol) became a special symbol at the 3rd timing. In some cases, the left symbol and the right symbol become special symbols in the middle of the third timing, but the middle symbol does not finally become a special symbol.

Next, the fourth timing at which the level of the stage can be raised is reached. At this time, if all the decorative symbols change to special symbols almost all at once, the level of the stage will increase. The effect at the 4th timing is slightly different from the method of raising the level of the 2nd and 3rd timings (an example in which the symbol changes to a special symbol in order at the timing when the symbol is stopped and displayed). Appearance of the theme that is the motif for the three decorative symbols that are Can be mentioned.

Next, the timing of leveling up the stage after the decorative pattern becomes a tenpai will be described.

After the decorative pattern becomes a tenpai (sometimes referred to as during normal reach), it reaches the fifth timing where any of multiple stage level-up effects may occur.

At the 5th timing, stage level up by button production, stage level up after reach, stage level up by fanning production, stage level up after normal reach loss (middle symbol is +1 shift), after normal reach loss (middle symbol is -1 shift) It is configured so that stage level up by special stage level up production and stage level up after mission reach can occur.

In the stage level up by the button effect, it is shown that the stage level up is confirmed when the button image is displayed on the effect display device SG at the timing, and the stage level is increased regardless of the presence or absence of the button operation.

Post-reach stage level-up In stage level-up by fanning, after the introduction of the post-reach stage level-up fanning effect, the post-reach stage level-up fanning effect occurs, and if successful, the stage level goes up. If it fails, the stage level is maintained.

In the stage level up after the normal reach loss (the middle symbol is +1 shift), if it is decided in advance to raise the stage level when the middle symbol is lost by +1 shift in the normal reach (example: 787). , The stage level goes up. It should be noted that the stage level is not always raised when the middle symbol is lost by +1 in the normal reach.

In the stage level up by the special stage level up effect after the normal reach loss (the middle symbol is -1 shift), it is the stage of stage level 1 and the middle symbol is lost by -1 shift in the normal reach (example: 767). A special stage level-up effect that raises the stage level will occur, and the stage level will rise to stage level 3. In addition, when the stage level is 1 and the middle symbol is lost by -1 in the normal reach, the special stage level-up effect is not always performed.

In the stage level up after the mission reach, the stage level shifts to the mission reach after the tempai, and the stage level goes up to the level 3 after the mission reach. In the mission reach, the lost symbol, the hit symbol, the super reach development symbol, and the stage level 3 transition symbol rotate like a roulette wheel, and the display corresponding to the stopped symbol is performed. That is, the stage level is raised to the stage level 3 when the stage level 3 transition symbol is stopped.

In addition, in order to make the stage level recognizable, even after the tempai (during reach production: during normal reach, during super reach), the character display indicating the stay stage is configured to be displayed on the upper right or upper left of the effect display device SG, for example. Alternatively, characters such as "Lv2" and "Lv3" may be displayed when the stage level is raised.

The effect related to the level-up at each level-up timing mentioned here is an example, and the level-up effect may be executed in different modes at each timing. For example, although an example of an effect using a decorative symbol is shown in the period of timings 1 to 4 before the reach, an effect using no decorative symbol may be executed.

<Flow of stage level up before Tempai>
Next, FIG. 86 is an image diagram of the stage level up before the tempai.

Currently, he is staying in stage A, which is stage level 1, and there is one hold of the first main game symbol (first special symbol), and the fluctuation of the first main game symbol has stopped. On the display screen of the effect display device SG, one first hold display is displayed, and the first hold sub display indicating the number of holds of the first main game symbol is displayed on the right side of the second decorative symbol as "1". , The first decorative symbol (main decorative symbol) and the second decorative symbol (sub-decorative symbol) are stopped and displayed at "861", and the characters "stage A" are displayed.

Next, the fluctuation is started, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol become the variable display (for example, scroll display, rotation display, etc.), the first hold display is deleted, and the fluctuation suggestion display is displayed. The first hold sub-display is subtracted by 1 to become "0". Since he / she is still staying at the stage A, the character display of "stage A" remains as it is.

Next, all the first decorative symbols are changed to flame symbols, which are special symbols. (Suddenly level up)

Next, when the first decorative symbol was changed to a flame symbol, which is a special symbol, the stage level went up and became stage AA of stage level 2, so the character display of the stage was "Lv2: stage AA". It has become.

Next, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started (re-variated) again.

Next, the left symbol is displayed as "8", and then the left symbol changes from "8" to a flame symbol. (Second timing)

Next, the right symbol is displayed as "6", and then the right symbol changes from "6" to a flame symbol. (Start of 3rd timing)

Next, a fanning effect (for example, the light flame symbol gradually changes to a dark flame symbol) is performed to determine whether or not the flame symbol is displayed on the middle symbol.

Next, the middle symbol is displayed as a flame symbol, and all the first decorative symbols are flame symbols. (End of 3rd timing)

Next, when the first decorative symbol was changed to a flame symbol, which is a special symbol, the stage level went up and became stage XXX of stage level 3, so the character display of the stage was "Lv3: stage XXX". ".

Next, the variation display of the first decorative symbol is started (re-variation) again, and thereafter, the game progresses until the variation is stopped at the stage XXX of the stage level 3. Even if the level is not raised at the first timing, if the level is raised at the second timing and the third timing, the first decorative symbol will be re-changed. The stage level may be raised again at the second timing and the third timing (or the fourth timing) in the relevant period.

In addition, although the end of the level-up effect is not shown in the figure, the level-up effect is performed when the effect is performed based on the advance notice effect of the content according to the stage level and it is lost or when it becomes a big hit. It is configured to be terminated. For example, in stage level 2, if it develops into normal reach or super reach and becomes a loss (or a big hit), it ends, and if it shifts to stage level 3, it ends in a super reach and it becomes a loss (or a big hit). An example is given that is configured to end in. In addition, as a modification, in the fluctuation after these final conditions are satisfied, the stage level is taken over when the fluctuation mode with the expected degree equal to or higher than the level-up effect scheduled to be completed is executed. It may be configured to be displayed.

<Notice lottery>
Next, with reference to FIG. 87, a lottery method for advance notice in a fluctuation in which the stage level rises will be illustrated.

First, in this gaming machine, whether or not the stage level is raised is configured to be based on a fluctuation pattern (variation mode) determined by the CPU MC of the main control board M. Here, the case where the fluctuation pattern 30 (Lv1 → temporary stop (flame symbol) → Lv2 → normal reach → battle reach → hit) is selected will be described.

Upon receiving the information (command or the like) regarding the fluctuation pattern of the determined fluctuation pattern, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the advance notice lottery corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern.

The CPUSC of the sub-control board S first draws a lottery as to whether or not the notice to be executed in the stage A, which is the stage level 1, can be executed. In stage A, three notices A1, notice A2, and notice A3 are configurable, and a lottery is performed in which it is possible to collectively determine whether or not each notice can be executed. For example, ID0 is "notice A1: none (do not execute), notice A2: none, notice A3: none", and ID1 is "notice A1: yes (execute), notice A2: none, notice A3: none". , ID2 is "Notice A1: Yes, Notice A2: Yes, Notice A3: No".

Next, a lottery of the notice pattern that determines the display mode of the notice whose execution is decided is performed. Here, when ID1 (“Notice A1: Yes, Notice A2: None, Notice A3: None”) is selected in the lottery for whether or not to execute the notice of the previous stage A, that is, it is decided to execute the notice A1. Therefore, the notice pattern lottery for the notice A1 is executed. As the notice pattern, for example, ID0 is pattern 1, ID1 is pattern 2, and ID2 is pattern 3. Here, it is assumed that ID1 is selected.

Next, a lottery will be held as to whether or not the notice to be executed in stage AA, which is stage level 2, can be executed. In stage AA, three notices, notice AA1, notice AA2, and notice AA3, are configured to be executable, and a lottery is performed in which it is possible to collectively determine whether or not each notice can be executed. For example, ID0 is "notice AA1: none (do not execute), notice AA2: none, notice AA3: none", and ID1 is "notice AA1: yes (execute), notice AA2: none, notice AA3: none". , ID2 is "Notice AA1: Yes, Notice AA2: Yes, Notice AA3: No".

Next, a lottery of the notice pattern that determines the display mode of the notice whose execution is decided is performed. Here, when ID2 (“Notice AA1: Yes, Notice AA2: Yes, Notice AA3: None”) is selected in the lottery for whether or not to execute the notice of the previous stage AA, that is, the notice AA1 and the notice AA2 are executed. Since it has been decided, the notice pattern lottery for the notice AA1 and the notice AA2 will be executed. As the notice pattern, for example, in each notice, ID0 is pattern 1, ID1 is pattern 2, and ID2 is pattern 3. Here, it is assumed that ID0 is selected for the notice AA1 and ID2 is selected for the notice AA2.

Next, a lottery will be held on whether or not the notice to be executed during the reach can be executed. During the reach, three notices of reach 1, 2, and reach 3 are configurable, and a lottery is performed in which it is possible to collectively determine whether or not each notice can be executed. For example, ID0 is "1: none during reach, 2: none during reach, 3: none during reach", and ID1 is "1: yes during reach, 2: none during reach, 3: none during reach", ID2 is "1 in reach, 2: yes in reach, 3: no in reach".

Next, a lottery of the notice pattern that determines the display mode of the notice whose execution is decided is performed. Here, when ID1 (“Reach 1: Yes, Reach 2: Yes, Reach 3: None”) is selected in the lottery for whether or not to execute the previous notice during reach, that is, 1 during reach is executed. Since it has been decided to do so, a notice pattern lottery for 1 during reach will be executed. As the notice pattern, for example, ID0 is pattern 1, ID1 is pattern 2, ID2 is pattern 3, and ID3 is pattern 4. Here, it is assumed that ID2 is selected.

Next, a lottery will be held as to whether or not the notice to be executed during Super Reach (SP) (Battle SP, etc.) can be executed. During the super reach, three notices of SP 1, SP 2, and SP 3 can be executed, and a lottery is performed in which it is possible to collectively determine whether or not each notice can be executed. For example, ID0 is "SP 1: None, SP 2: None, SP 3: None", and ID1 is "SP 1: Yes, SP 2: None, SP 3: None", ID2 is "1: Yes in SP, 2: Yes in SP, 3: None in SP".

Next, a lottery of the notice pattern that determines the display mode of the notice whose execution is decided is performed. Here, when ID2 (“SP in 1: Yes, SP in 2: Yes, SP in 3: None”) is selected in the lottery for whether or not to execute the notice during the previous SP, that is, 1 in SP and SP Since it has been decided to execute the middle 2, the notice pattern lottery for the SP 1 and the SP 2 is executed. As the notice pattern, for example, in each notice, ID0 is pattern 1, ID1 is pattern 2, ID2 is pattern 3, and ID3 is pattern 4. Here, it is assumed that ID3 is selected for 1 in SP and ID3 is selected for 2 in SP.

Next, to summarize the results of the lottery for the notice,
1. 1. Lottery for whether or not to execute the notice at stage level 1 (stage A) ⇒ ID1: There is notice A1 2. Notice pattern lottery for notice A1 ⇒ ID1: Pattern 2
3. 3. Lottery for whether or not to execute the notice at stage level 2 (stage AA) ⇒ ID2: There is notice AA1 and there is notice AA2 4. Notice AA1 notice pattern lottery ⇒ ID0: Pattern 1
Notice AA2 notice pattern lottery ⇒ ID2: Pattern 3
5. Lottery for whether or not to execute the notice during reach ⇒ ID1: There is 1 during reach 6. Notice pattern lottery for 1 during reach ⇒ ID2: Pattern 3
7. Execution availability lottery for notice during SP ⇒ ID2: 1 in SP, 2 in SP 8. Notice pattern lottery for 1 in SP ⇒ ID3: Pattern 4
Notice pattern lottery for 2 in SP ⇒ ID3: Pattern 4
It has become.

In this way, by associating the fluctuation pattern with whether or not the stage level can be executed, it is possible to execute the advance notice lottery only for the necessary amount to correspond to the stage level up even in the advance notice lottery. ..

<Example of change of notice lottery>
If the stage level up is not tied to the fluctuation pattern and is determined by lottery (stage level up execution availability lottery, timing lottery, level up number lottery, etc.), it is assumed that each stage level is from the start of the change to the end of the change. All the notice lottery is executed for each stage level of the contents of the notice effect to be displayed when it is executed in (from the start of the change to the end of the change), and the timing to level up (the timing when the level up effect occurs) is separately set. The notice effect to be executed at the stage where the stage level is raised during the lottery and the variable display may be configured to switch the result of the notice lottery according to the stage level after the level up.

Specifically, when staying in stage A at the start of the fluctuation, first, a lottery for whether or not the advance notice can be executed at stage A at stage level 1 and a pattern lottery (including during reach and SP), and stage AA at stage level 2 Notice lottery and pattern lottery, stage XXX notice lottery and pattern lottery at stage level 3 are executed.

Next, a stage level-up lottery is performed, and if the execution of the stage level-up is not decided in the stage level-up execution possibility lottery, the decision result of the advance notice execution possibility lottery and the pattern lottery of the stage A which is the stage level 1 If the execution / execution timing / number of level-ups of the stage level-up is determined by the lottery, the stage is stage level 1 until the stage level-up is performed. The decision result of the advance notice execution possibility lottery and the pattern lottery of A is used, and after the stage level up is performed, the decision result of the advance notice execution possibility lottery and the pattern lottery of the stage AA of the stage level 2 or the stage XXX of the stage level 3 is used. It will be.

<Flow of stage level up by pre-reading production>
Next, FIG. 88 is an image diagram of the stage level up by the look-ahead effect. For example, when a new hold (third hold) occurs, the CPUMC of the main control board M obtains a determination result that the variation pattern number 32 of FIG. 87 is executed by the pre-determination of the CPUMC, and the secondary The CPUSC of the control board S performs a look-ahead execution enable / disable lottery based on a command indicating that the variation pattern number 32 transmitted from the CPUMC of the main control board M is executed, and the execution of the stage level up by the look-ahead effect is determined. If so, it is an example of the flow of production that can be executed in.

Currently, he is staying in stage A, which is stage level 1, and there are three reservations for the first main game symbol (first special symbol), and the fluctuation of the first main game symbol has stopped. On the display screen of the effect display device SG, three first hold displays are displayed, and the first hold sub display indicating the number of holds of the first main game symbol is displayed on the right side of the second decorative symbol as "3". , The first decorative symbol (main decorative symbol) and the second decorative symbol (sub-decorative symbol) are stopped and displayed at "861", and the characters "stage A" are displayed.

Next, the fluctuation has started, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol become the variable display, one of the first reserved displays is erased, the variable suggestion display is displayed, and the first reserved sub-display is subtracted by 1. It is "2". Since he / she is still staying at the stage A, the character display of "stage A" remains as it is.

Next, although a small explosion image is displayed in the substantially center of the effect display device SG, the stage level is not increased by displaying the small explosion image.

Next, the display of the small explosion image is erased, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped at "716", and the fluctuation is stopped. When the fluctuation is stopped, the fluctuation suggestion display is not displayed.

Next, the next fluctuation is started, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol become variable display, one first hold display is erased, the change suggestion display is displayed, and the first hold sub display is subtracted by 1. It is "1". Since he / she is still staying at the stage A, the character display of "stage A" remains as it is.

Next, a small explosion image is displayed in the substantially center of the effect display device SG, and then the small explosion image is changed to a large explosion image.

Next, the display of the large explosion image is erased, and the stage level rises when the large explosion image is displayed. Therefore, the characters "Lv2: Stage AA" are displayed, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are displayed. The decorative pattern stops at "871", and it is a variable stop.

Next, the next fluctuation is started, and thereafter, the game progresses until the fluctuation is stopped at stage AA of stage level 2.

In this way, the look-ahead effect executed before the change of the look-ahead trigger hold (the hold that won the lottery to start the look-ahead effect) is an effect for suggesting that the look-ahead trigger hold is a big hit. The fact is that we rarely expect a big hit for the fluctuation before the fluctuation of the look-ahead opportunity hold. In this example, although not described in detail, the notice can be displayed even after the look-ahead effect is displayed, but if the look-ahead effect is displayed, whether or not the fluctuation becomes a big hit. It may be configured not to display a notice for inciting. For example, if the look-ahead effect displayed before the look-ahead trigger hold is configured to be displayed only when the loss change occurs, the player will not be hit by the change when the look-ahead effect is displayed. It is possible to pay attention only to the display mode of the above, and to effectively instigate whether or not the change related to the subsequent hold will result in a hit.

Further, in this example, as the loss variation pattern in the low probability / low base (normal time), a variation pattern having a relatively short variation time such as a variation mode a1 for 3 seconds and a variation mode a2 for 5 seconds is provided. Therefore, the look-ahead effect is configured so that it can be displayed immediately after the start of the fluctuation.

In addition, in the fluctuation that the look-ahead effect is displayed, at least a part of the advance notice lottery table (table of advance notice execution availability lottery, table of pattern lottery) is different depending on whether the stage level is raised or not. Will be.

Furthermore, when the look-ahead effect (including the stage level-up fanning effect, that is, not related to the success or failure of the stage level-up) is executed, the notice that may occur immediately after the start of the fluctuation, that is, the look-ahead effect and the effect display timing. For notices that may overlap, even if it is decided in the notice lottery that the notice will be executed, it will not be executed (cancelled) so as not to interfere with the display of the look-ahead effect. May be good.

When the pre-reading effect is executed, a predetermined lottery table may be used so that the advance notice of overlapping display is not executed.

In addition, when the look-ahead effect is executed, the execution timing of the notice that the display overlaps is configured to be changeable, and after the display of the look-ahead effect ends, the notice that the display overlaps with the look-ahead effect is displayed. By configuring it so that both notice effects can be displayed.

In this example, in the stage level up in the look-ahead effect, the display of the small explosion image and the large explosion image is used without using the decorative symbol, but the decorative symbol may be used. For example, the stage level may be increased when a special symbol is displayed.

<Stage level-up lottery table for pre-reading production>
Next, FIG. 89 is a stage level-up lottery table for the look-ahead effect.

First, as a precondition shown in this figure, the execution of the look-ahead effect is decided in the hold where the ball is newly entered in the fourth hold, and the next change is the change related to the hold of "hold 3", and then the next change. The change related to the hold of "hold 2", then the change related to the hold of "hold 1", and finally the change of the hold related to "the change" for which the execution of the look-ahead effect is determined, are performed in this order.

In addition, for example, when the execution of the look-ahead effect is newly decided in the third hold, ID 4 to 8 in this figure are determined, and the next change is "hold 2". It is possible to configure the fluctuation to be related to the hold.

Whether or not the look-ahead effect can be executed The lottery is executed when there is no fluctuation pattern equal to or greater than the reach in the hold that entered the ball first, and until the change of the hold that triggered the start of the look-ahead effect is completed. Explains that the lottery for whether or not a new look-ahead effect can be executed is not performed. It may be configured to perform a pre-reading effect execution enable / non-execution lottery. In this case, the result of the execution enablement / non-execution lottery and the pattern lottery by the new look-ahead effect can be overwritten and executed.

In the stage level-up lottery table, the success / failure of the stage level-up until the change of the hold (here, the change = the latest hold) that triggered the start of the look-ahead effect is collectively determined.

For example, when ID1 is selected, first, when the fluctuation related to the hold of "hold 3" starts, the stage level-up fanning effect (display of the small explosion image in FIG. 88) is displayed, but it fails (= stage). The level does not increase, that is, the large explosion image shown in FIG. 88 is not displayed), and the fluctuation ends. Next, when the change related to the hold of "Hold 2" starts, the stage level-up fanning effect is displayed, but it fails and the change ends. Next, when the fluctuation related to the hold of "Hold 1" starts, the stage level up fanning effect is displayed, and it becomes successful (= the stage level goes up, that is, the large explosion image of FIG. 88 is displayed). The stage level goes up from level 1 to level 2, and the fluctuation ends. Next, the change related to the hold of the "change" starts at stage level 2.

As shown in the variation pattern number 32 of FIG. 87, when it is specified by the CPUMC of the main control board M and the CPUSC of the sub-control board S that the variation is a variation pattern defined to start from Lv2. The CPUSC of the sub-control board S may be configured to be able to select ID1 and ID5 as the stage level-up (look-ahead) pattern.

As described above, as shown in FIGS. 33, 86, 88, etc., in this gaming machine, it is suggested whether or not the fluctuation becomes a big hit by raising the stage level within one fluctuation based on the fluctuation pattern. Omitting the pattern to be performed and the effect of raising the stage level over multiple fluctuations to raise the level due to the change related to the later hold (for example, when the stage level is raised by the look-ahead effect and the LV2 change starts, the look-ahead It is not necessary to display the effect that the stage level is leveled up from level 1 to level 2 in the target fluctuation), and it has a pattern suggesting whether or not it becomes a big hit.

In this gaming machine, there is a possibility that a variation pattern (eg, variation mode A4) associated with a stage level up by a look-ahead effect may be selected even when there is no hold.

In this case, since the look-ahead effect cannot be executed, the pattern by ID7 or ID8 is configured to be selected, and the stage level up that could not be executed as the look-ahead effect is executed at the start of the change (immediately after the start of the change). You can deal with it by doing it. Here, in the look-ahead lottery for the hold that occurred under the situation where there is no hold, the stage level is raised immediately after the start of the fluctuation (the stage level is suddenly raised). However, if the stage level has not been raised by the start of the fluctuation, the stage level will be raised not in the look-ahead lottery but in the advance notice lottery at the start of the fluctuation in which the fluctuation of the fluctuation mode A4 will be performed. It may be configured to determine the content of the production to be performed.

As described above, the fluctuation in which the look-ahead effect (success / failure of stage level up) is executed is a fluctuation pattern that does not reach reach, and a notice other than the look-ahead effect (for example, normal) regardless of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern. Notice) is configured not to be executed. With this configuration, the player will pay attention to the look-ahead effect, and the look-ahead effect can be felt as an effect with high expectations for a big hit.
<<< Reach production >>>
Next, FIG. 90 is a timing chart of the annihilation effect, which is the reach effect.

The annihilation effect is an effect during the reach that can occur after the tempai (reach), and determines the development effect 1 that develops after that. It should be noted in advance that after the annihilation effect, it does not always develop into the development effect 1 (battle effect), and after the development effect 1, it does not necessarily develop into the development effect 2 (battle effect).

First, when the annihilation effect is started, the character can be selected. The annihilation effect is configured so that the effect mode differs depending on the selected character.

<Timing chart when character A is selected>
When the character A is selected, the button effect is generated up to three times. There are three pressing patterns: single press, long press, and continuous hit. Repeated hits are easy to select when the expectation of a big hit is high. In the case of repeated hits, the production time for two single pushes is set. It is configured to be used. In addition, long press indicates that the button effect period for which this long press is selected will not be annihilated, but it will be a chance (there is a high possibility that many enemies can be annihilated) at the next button operation. It is configured (specifically, when a subsequent button effect occurs, an image imitating a button that is an operation promotion image of the effect button is displayed in a chance-up mode such as red, or more enemies are annihilated. Can be mentioned). At the end of the annihilation effect, a development fan button effect is performed, in which if it succeeds, it develops into development effect 1, and if it fails, it ends in fluctuation. Further, after the development effect 1, the development effect 2 can be executed.
<Timing chart when character B is selected>
When the character B is selected, the button effect is generated 6 times. The pressing pattern is only a single pressing, and is configured to suggest a jackpot expectation degree depending on the displayed effect mode. At the end of the annihilation effect, as in the case of character A selection, a development fan button effect is performed, in which if it succeeds, it develops into a development effect, and if it fails, it ends in fluctuation. Further, after the development effect 1, the development effect 2 can be executed.

As described above, in the annihilation effect, the character A and the character B are configured to be selectable, and the effect time of the character A and the effect time of the character B are the same. By configuring the effect time for one button effect (single press) when character A is selected and the effect time for two button effects when character B is selected to be approximately the same time, different effect modes are executed. It is possible.

<Flow of annihilation effect when character A is selected>
Next, with reference to FIG. 91, the flow of the annihilation effect when the character A is selected will be described.

First, the display screen is changing at stage A, and the tempai is established at "8".

Next, it develops into a annihilation effect, and a character selection screen for selecting character A or character B is displayed. On the character selection screen, the characters "Please select a character" are displayed, the choices "A" and "B", and the cross key SB-2 for executing the selection are displayed. The character selection is configured to be confirmed when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, and the currently selected option is highlighted during the selection. There is.

Next, the selected character (character A in this case) is displayed, suggesting that the display is such that the enemy is annihilated. Here, the reach symbol "8" is displayed at the top of the screen, and the decorative symbol numbers 1 to 8 are displayed at the bottom of the screen, indicating the number of annihilated enemies (here, "" 0/8 ") is being carried out. The numbers that are the decorative symbols at the bottom of the screen are the final stop symbols other than the left symbol and the right symbol that are in the reach state, and represent the candidate symbols as the stop symbols of the decorative symbols in the changing middle symbol row. ..

Next, an enemy character (one of the enemy characters 1 to 18 during the annihilation effect) is displayed, and a button image indicating that the button can be pressed to annihilate the enemy character is displayed.

Next, in the case where the enemy character is annihilated, "x" is displayed on the enemy character, the annihilation number display is "1/8", and "x" is displayed on "4" which was a selectable decorative pattern. Is displayed, indicating that "4" is not selected as the lost symbol of the final stop symbol displayed in the first decorative symbol.

Next, the character A is displayed before the second button is pressed.

Next, an enemy character different from the first one is displayed, a button image is displayed, and the second button can be pressed.

Next, in the case where the enemy character is annihilated, "x" is displayed on the enemy character, the annihilation number display is "2/8", and "x" is displayed on "5" which was a selectable decorative pattern. Is displayed, indicating that "5" is not selected as the lost symbol.

Next, the character A is displayed before the button is pressed for the third time.

Next, an enemy character different from the first and second times is displayed, a button image is displayed, and the button can be pressed for the third time.

Next, in the case where the enemy character is annihilated, "x" is displayed on the enemy character, the annihilation number display is "3/8", and "x" is displayed on "2" which was a selectable pattern. It is displayed to indicate that "2" is not selected as the lost symbol.

Next, a button effect is performed to suggest whether or not to develop into development effect 1 (battle effect), and the text display and button image of "If you press the button and succeed, the battle effect develops!" Are displayed. ing.

Next, the development fanning button effect for suggesting whether or not to develop into the development effect 1 (battle effect) is successful, and the effect movable object YK is moving in front of the effect display device SG.

Next, it has evolved into development production 1 (battle production).

In this way, in the annihilation effect when character A is selected, the lost symbol is destroyed (including the display of "x") every time the enemy character is annihilated, and the winning symbol is shown by indicating that the lost symbol is not selected. It is configured so that the possibility of being selected is visually recognizable.

The button pressing pattern in the annihilation effect when character A is selected is
(1) Single push → Single push → Single push (2) Single push → Long press → Single push (3) Single push → Repeated hit (4) Long press → Single push → Single push (5) Long press → Continuous hit Is configured to.

In addition, the symbol destruction (display of "x" in the candidate display of the final stop decorative symbol at the bottom of the screen) in the annihilation effect when character A is selected is
(1) Single push: No symbol destruction, 1 symbol destruction, 2 symbol destruction, 3 symbol destruction (2) Long press: 3 next symbol destruction, 4 next symbol destruction, 5 next symbol destruction One, next 6 symbol destruction (3) In the case of repeated hits: It is configured to be selected from 3 symbol destruction, 4 symbol destruction, 5 symbol destruction, and 6 symbol destruction.

<Flow of annihilation effect when character B is selected>
Next, with reference to FIG. 92, the flow of the annihilation effect when the character B is selected will be described.

First, the display screen is changing at stage A, and the tempai is established at "8".

Next, it develops into a annihilation effect, and a character selection screen for selecting character A or character B is displayed. On the character selection screen, the characters "Please select a character" are displayed, the choices "A" and "B", and the cross key SB-2 for executing the selection are displayed. The character selection is configured to be confirmed when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, and the currently selected option is highlighted during the selection. There is.

Next, the selected character (character B in this case) is displayed, suggesting that the display is such that the enemy is annihilated. Here, the reach symbol "8" is displayed at the top of the screen, and the decorative symbol numbers 1 to 8 are displayed at the bottom of the screen, indicating the number of annihilated enemies (here, "" 0/8 ") is being carried out.

Next, the enemy character is displayed, a button image for destroying the enemy character is displayed, and a target mark is displayed on the symbol "6" to be destroyed. When the character B is selected, a plurality of button images become one button when the enemy character is annihilated, and the number of the collected plurality of button images suggests the degree of expectation of destroying the symbol. Here, an effect pattern in which two button images are gathered is displayed, and when the two button images are moved so as to overlap the lower center of the screen, the display mode of the button image indicates that the operation of the effect button is effective. It is configured as.

Next, in the case where the enemy character could not be annihilated, the enemy character is displayed without being annihilated, and the annihilation number display remains "0/8". However, there is a crack in the symbol "6" that is the target of destruction.

Next, the character B is displayed before the button is pressed for the second time.

Next, the same enemy character as the first time is displayed again, an effect pattern in which the two button images are gathered is displayed, and the button can be pressed the second time. The target mark is displayed again at "6" with cracks.

Next, when the enemy character is annihilated, "x" is displayed on the enemy character, the number of annihilations is displayed as "1/8", and "x" is displayed on the symbol "6" on which the target mark is displayed. It is displayed and is a display indicating that "6" is not selected as a lost symbol.

Next, the character B is displayed before the button is pressed for the third time.

Next, an enemy character different from the first and second times is displayed, an effect pattern in which four button images are gathered is displayed, a target mark is displayed on the symbol "3" to be destroyed, and the third button is pressed. Is possible.

Next, in the case of annihilating the enemy character, "x" is displayed on the enemy character, "x" is displayed on the symbol "3" on which the target mark is displayed, and four button images are gathered. Since the effect pattern is a chance pattern, "x" is also displayed for "4", indicating that "3" and "4" are not selected as the lost pattern, and the number of annihilations is displayed. It is "3/8". In this example, only one target mark is displayed, and the "x" display is also displayed on the symbol that does not display the target mark, which gives the player an additional chance to increase the chance of displaying the effect result. Although it is configured to display the fact that it has been done, the target mark is displayed first for all the symbols that are not to be selected as the lost symbols first depending on the display pattern of the button image, the type of enemy character, etc. May be.

After that, the production is performed up to the 6th time, and the button production is performed to suggest whether or not to develop to the development production 1 (battle production) at the end, as in the case of character A selection. If it succeeds, the battle production will develop! "And the button image is displayed.

Next, the development fan button effect for suggesting whether or not to develop to the development effect 1 (battle effect) fails, and the effect movable object YK does not move in front of the effect display device SG, and the fluctuation stops. It has become.

It should be noted that the button pressing pattern in the annihilation effect when the character B is selected is only a single pressing.

In addition, the symbol destruction in the annihilation effect when character B is selected is configured to correspond to the number of button images.
(1) 2 button images: nothing, crack, 1 destruction, multiple destruction (2) 4 button images: 1 destruction, multiple destruction (3) 8 button images: multiple destruction To.

<Supplement to the common specifications for character A and character B>

The enemy characters (1 to 18) that appear during the annihilation effect have the expected degree of symbol destruction associated with the enemy character. For example, the expected degree of symbol destruction is enemy character 1 <enemy character 7 <enemy. It can be configured to be the character 12. Furthermore, the repeated hits and eight button images, which are high-expectation patterns for symbol destruction, are configured to easily occur in the order of enemy character 1 <enemy character 7 <enemy character 12.

Further, it is preferable that the enemy characters (1 to 18) are grouped according to the expected degree of the number of symbol destructions. Low expectation group: enemy characters 1 to 6, medium expectation group: enemy character 7. ~ 12, High Expectation Group: Enemy characters 12 ~ 18, etc. can be configured.

If the button is not pressed during the annihilation effect, the enemy character is not apparently annihilated and the symbol is not destroyed. In addition, when the button is not pressed, the number of symbol destructions is displayed as "? /?", "1 /?", "? / 8" so that the player cannot recognize the number of symbol destructions. May be.

If a long press pattern is selected during the annihilation effect and the effect button is pressed for a long time, the button image changes to a chance button image (one size larger, etc.), and the chance button image is translucent until the next button press timing. It is configured to continue to be displayed with, indicating that the next button press is an opportunity. On the other hand, if the effect button is not pressed for a long time, the button image is deleted and the semi-transparent chance button image is not displayed.

In the continuous striking pattern during the annihilation effect, a display is performed in which a plurality of enemy characters (the same character or different characters) are collectively annihilated, making it easy to recognize that it is a chance.

If the number of symbols destroyed in the annihilation effect is 3, the development to the development effect 1 will develop into the battle effect A with the enemy character A, and the ratio (expectation) of the big hit will be 1/5 (8). (Because 3 of the decorative symbols are destroyed and not selected), and if the number of destroyed symbols in the annihilation effect is 4, it will develop into a battle effect B with the enemy character B and become a big hit. The ratio is 1/4, and if the number of destroyed symbols in the annihilation effect is 5 or more, it will develop into a battle effect C with the enemy character C, and the ratio of big hits is 1/3, in the annihilation effect. If the number of destroyed symbols is 6, it develops into a battle effect D with the enemy character D, and the ratio of big hits is 1/2.

It is preferable that the success probability of the development fan button effect is configured to increase as the number of symbol destruction increases (the larger the number of symbol destruction, the higher the expectation of the development effect 1 that develops later, that is, the battle effect). However, if the development production 1 is not developed, the player's expectations will be disappointing and the motivation for playing will be diminished.) Further, if the number of symbol destruction is 3 or less, a pattern that succeeds in the development fan button effect may be provided, and if the number of symbol destruction is 3 or less, the process may be configured to shift to the battle effect A.

Further, if the number of symbols destroyed is 3 or more, the development fanning button effect may be succeeded and the process may be shifted to the battle effect.

Further, the battle effect D with the enemy character D occurs as the development effect 1 when the transition is from the annihilation effect to the development effect 1, and the transition from the annihilation effect to the development effect 1 (≠ battle effect D) to the development effect 2. It is configured so that it can occur in two ways when it occurs as the development effect 2 in the case of doing.

Specifically, as described above, if the number of symbols destroyed in the annihilation effect is 6 or more, it develops into battle effect D, and if the number of symbols destroyed in the effect effect is 5 or less, it goes to battle effects A to C. Develop. The effect is configured so that the symbol can be destroyed even during the execution of the battle effects A to C. For example, the symbol is destroyed by 1 in SP determined in the lottery for the notice during Super Reach (SP) in FIG. It is configured to determine the presence or absence.

In this case, three more symbols are destroyed during the execution of the battle effect A, two more symbols are destroyed during the execution of the battle effect B, and one more symbol is destroyed during the execution of the battle effect C. Since the total number of symbols destroyed is 6, the condition for developing into battle production D as development production 2 after the battle production of development production 1 during execution is satisfied, and to battle production D after the battle production during execution. Develop. Even if a symbol is destroyed during battle production A and battle production B and one (or two) symbols are destroyed, battle production B or battle with a higher expectation of a big hit than the ongoing battle production It does not develop into production C, and develops into battle production D when a total of 6 symbols are destroyed.

Therefore, the display of "N / M" (N = number of symbol destruction, M = total number of target symbols) indicating the number of symbols destroyed may be continued even during the execution of battle effects A to C. However, the number of symbols destroyed may be hidden during the execution of the battle effect. If "N / M" is configured to continue to be displayed during the execution of battle effects A to C, it is configured to be hidden when the last symbol destruction timing during the execution of battle effects A to C has elapsed. can do.

In addition, as a modification example, a specific battle effect (for example, a battle effect D that has the highest expectation and may develop even after the transition to another battle effect) among the battle effects A to D is changed by a big hit. By setting the condition to be executed (winning in the production lottery) that it is a big hit symbol α2 when it becomes a big hit, if it becomes a big hit in a specific battle production, "Big bonus" (Big hit that shifts to high probability / high base after big hit) ”, and it is configured to raise the degree of attention to the player that the symbol is destroyed during the annihilation production or the battle production. May be good.

<<< Opportunity >>
Next, the chance eye, which is a special stop combination, which is one of the look-ahead effects, will be described.

The colors of the decorative patterns in this game machine are "1: green", "2: blue", "3: red", "4: blue", "5: green", "6: blue", "7: red", and "8:". It is "blue", and like the expectations of other notices, the jackpot expectation indicated by the decorative design is configured to increase in the order of blue <green <red. For example, the reach with a green symbol has a higher expectation of a big hit than the reach with a blue symbol, and the reach with a red symbol has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the reach with a green symbol. Further, in the chance eyes described here, the jackpot expectation is similarly increased in the order of the blue symbol chance eye <green symbol chance eye <red symbol chance eye.

The chance eye in this gaming machine may be a state in which three decorative symbols of the same color are not aligned, and two decorative symbols of the same color may be aligned side by side. For example, "223" is configured as "2" blue symbol chance, "655" is configured as "5" green symbol chance, and "533" is configured as "3" red symbol chance. ..

First, as described with reference to FIG. 70, the chance eye is executed when the lottery result (winning the chance eye) including "chance eye: Yes" is obtained by the lottery by the look-ahead lottery table.

When the chance eye is won by the lottery by the look-ahead lottery table, one of the execution patterns is determined with reference to the chance eye scenario determination table of FIG.

Next, the chance eye scenario pattern will be described with reference to FIG. 93.

The fourth chance-eye scenario pattern that can be determined when a new game ball enters is
(1) ID0 ... 3 Before change: Left blue → 2 Before change: Left blue → 1 Before change: Left blue * "Left blue" constitutes a blue symbol chance eye with the left symbol and the middle symbol (2) ID1 ... 3 Before change: Left blue → 2 Before change: Left blue → 1 Before change: Right blue * "Right blue" constitutes a blue symbol chance eye with the middle symbol and the right symbol (3) ID2 ...・ 3 Before change: Left blue → 2 Before change: Left green → 1 Before change: Right green (4) ID3 ・ ・ ・ 3 Before change: Left blue → 2 Before change: Left green → 1 Before change: Right red (5) ) ID4 ・ ・ ・ 3 Before change: Left blue → 2 Before change: Left green → 1 Before change: Promotion right red * "Promotion right red" is about to display the green symbol chance eye or after it is displayed once , The middle symbol and the right symbol make up the red symbol chance eye (6) ID5 ... 3 Before change: Left blue → 2 Before change: Promotion left green → 1 Before change: Promotion right red * "Promotion left green" is , The blue symbol chance eye is about to be displayed or once it is displayed, the left symbol and the middle symbol make up the green symbol chance eye (7) ID6 ... 3 Before change: Left green → 2 Before change: Left Green → 1 Before change: Left green (8) ID7 ・ ・ ・ 3 Before change: Left green → 2 Before change: Left green → 1 Before change: Left red (9) ID8 ・ ・ ・ 3 Before change: Left green → 2 Before change: Left red → 1 Before change: Right red (10) ID9 ... 3 Before change: Right red → 2 Before change: Right red → 1 Before change: Right red.

The third chance-eye scenario pattern that can be determined when a new game ball enters is
(1) ID0 ... 2 Before change: Left blue → 1 Before change: Left blue (2) ID1 ... 2 Before change: Left blue → 1 Before change: Right green (3) ID2 ... 2 Before change : Left blue → 1 Before change: Promotion Right green (4) ID3 ・ ・ ・ 2 Before change: Left green → 1 Before change: Left green (5) ID4 ・ ・ ・ 2 Before change: Left green → 1 Before change: Right Red (6) ID5 ... 2 Before change: Left green → 1 Before change: Promotion Right red (7) ID6 ... 2 Before change: Right red → 1 Before change: Right red.

The second chance-eye scenario pattern that can be determined when a new game ball enters is
(1) ID0 ... 1 before change: left blue (2) ID1 ... 1 before change: left green (3) ID2 ... 1 before change: promotion right green (4) ID3 ... 1 before change : Right red (5) ID4 ... 1 Before change: Promotion Right red.

ID0 is easy to be selected when the jackpot expectation is low, and is difficult to be selected when the jackpot expectation is high, ID9 is easy to be selected when the jackpot expectation is high, and is selected when the jackpot expectation is low. It is configured to be difficult, that is, it is configured so that the larger the ID, the easier it is to be selected when the expectation of a big hit is high.

When the chance eye scenario pattern is determined and the stop symbol is determined in the decorative symbol display content determination process in step 5700, it is determined which stop symbol is the chance eye. At this time, it is preferable that the stop symbol is determined so as not to reach the reach. Further, the two stop symbols constituting the chance eye may be the same symbol or may be different symbols (for example, symbols of the same color).

Next, the flow of the production of the chance eye will be described with reference to FIG. 94. As for the decorative symbols, "1" is a green symbol, "6" is a blue symbol, "7" is a red symbol, and "8" is a blue symbol.

First, the first main game symbol (first special symbol) is in a state of four pending, and the decorative symbol is "861" and the fluctuation is stopped.

Next, the fluctuation is started, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol become the variable display (for example, scroll display, rotation display, etc.), the first hold display is erased, and the fluctuation suggestion display is displayed. Then, the first hold sub-display is subtracted by 1 to become "3".

Next, immediately before the fluctuation stop, the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at "667", which is the chance of a blue symbol.

Next, the fluctuation is stopped, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are fixedly stopped at "667".

Next, the next fluctuation is started, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol become variable display, one first hold display is erased, the change suggestion display is displayed, and the first hold sub display is displayed. It is subtracted by 1 to become "2".

Next, immediately before the fluctuation stop, the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at "118", which is a chance for a green symbol.

Next, the fluctuation is stopped, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are fixedly stopped at "118".

Next, the next fluctuation is started, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol become variable display, one first hold display is erased, the change suggestion display is displayed, and the first hold sub display is displayed. It is subtracted by 1 to become "1".

Next, "1" is temporarily stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and then "7" is temporarily stopped and displayed on the right symbol.

Next, a display is made in which the middle symbol "1" moves from the top to the bottom of the LCD screen, and a display is made to indicate whether or not the "1" is stopped and a green symbol chance is reached. ..

Next, the middle symbol "1" is temporarily stopped and displayed, which is in the form of a green symbol chance eye. Here, instead of displaying the temporary stop of the middle symbol "1", a display may be performed to encourage whether or not the "1" is stopped.

Next, the symbol sequence of the middle symbol is displayed in a variable manner again.

Next, immediately before the fluctuation stop, the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at "177", which is a red symbol chance. In other words, in this fluctuation, the red symbol chance eye is shown instead of the green symbol chance eye.

In order to make it possible to accurately recognize the chance eyes for each fluctuation, for example, when the chance eyes in the fluctuation are displayed, the effect is displayed (for example, blue symbol chance eyes ⇒ blue effect, green symbol chance eyes ⇒ It may be configured to have a green effect, a red pattern chance eye ⇒ red effect). With this configuration, here, the green effect is not displayed in the display of the green chance eyes before the re-variation, and the red effect is displayed by the display of the red chance eyes after the re-variation.

Next, the fluctuation has stopped, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol have stopped at "177".

Then, the change of the hold that triggered the start of the chance (= won the chance lottery) has started.

<< Supplement for chances >>
<Display design>
For example, if "4" (blue symbol) is temporarily displayed on the left symbol and "5" (green symbol) is temporarily displayed on the right symbol, "4" is slowly scrolled and displayed on the middle symbol, and the blue symbol is a chance. A symbol that can be a low-expectation chance (here, "4") and a symbol that can be a high-expectation chance (here,) so that the "5" symbol is displayed as if it were. It is preferable to determine the decorative symbol so that "5") is a symbol with a number as close as possible.

By making such a decision, the time required to display the high-expected chance eyes is shortened. For example, the time required to scroll after "4" to display "5" (4 → 5) requires the scroll time for one symbol, and scroll after "4" to display "1". The time required for displaying (4 → 5 → 6 → 7 → 8 → 1 or 4 → 3 → 2 → 1) requires scroll time for 5 symbols or 3 symbols.

It is preferable to determine the decorative symbol so that the left and right symbols are as close as possible to each other, not only when the pattern for advancing the symbol is executed but also when the pattern for returning is executed. Is.

In addition, in this gaming machine, when the blue symbol ("2" "4" "6" "8") chance eye is displayed and the green symbol ("1" "5") chance eye is displayed. Is configured to select a green symbol that is closer to the blue symbol. For example, when the blue symbol is "2", the green symbol is "1", when the blue symbol is "4", the green symbol is "5", and when the blue symbol is "6", the green symbol is "5". When the blue symbol is "8", the green symbol is "1".

By configuring in this way, it is possible to display the chance up in a short time without spending more time than necessary, and the stress felt by the player by showing the chance up for a long time is felt. Can be mitigated.

In addition, as a modification, when chance eyes are continuously displayed over multiple fluctuations, at least one of the symbols that are stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol is the degree of expectation indicated by the previous chance symbol. It shall be configured so that it has a chance eye configuration symbol with the same degree of expectation (for example, if it was a blue symbol chance eye last time, the blue symbol is stopped and displayed on the left symbol or the right symbol), and the left and right symbols are in order. When the stop display is made, the chance eye configuration symbol that has the same expectation as the previous expectation is always stopped and displayed first (for example, if the stop display order of the decorative symbol is the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol in that order). If the left symbol is always the blue symbol, or if the right symbol can be stopped and displayed before the left symbol as the pattern of the stop display order of the decorative symbols, the blue symbol is the stop display symbol first on the right symbol. It may be configured to stop).

With this configuration, when the chance eye is displayed due to the previous fluctuation, the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed first is the chance eye configuration symbol that can have a higher expectation than the previous chance eye. In a situation where the expectation that the chance eye with higher expectation is stopped and displayed is higher than the previous fluctuation, it is lower than the chance eye composition symbol that was first stopped and displayed in the display of the second stop display symbol and the third stop display symbol. It is possible to prevent the chance eye configuration symbol of the degree of expectation from being stopped and displayed so that the feeling of expectation is attenuated within one fluctuation. In this modification, in the first variation of the chance eye effect, the stop order of the chance eye configuration symbols in the left symbol and the right symbol is not provided, and it is not known whether the chance eye is stopped and displayed, for example. Since the symbol that is first stopped and displayed in the variable eye becomes "3: red symbol", the possibility of the stop display of the chance eye disappears (the symbol that can be displayed as the chance eye configuration symbol that is higher than the red symbol as the second stop symbol is I try to prevent it.

<Display pattern>
In FIG. 94, the pattern in which the middle symbol is scrolled again to be the red symbol chance eye is described, but the pattern is not limited to the pattern in which only the middle symbol is scrolled again, and the left symbol or the right symbol that is temporarily stopped first is not limited to this pattern. Any one of the symbols may also be provided with a pattern for displaying the chance eye by scrolling again. For example, the chance eye may be displayed as "4 ↓ 6" ⇒ "4 (4) 6" (4 is a temporary stop display) ⇒ "4 ↓ ↓" ⇒ "455".

Further, a promotion failure pattern may be provided. For example, in the case of a pattern such as "3 before change: left blue → 2 before change: left blue → 1 before change: promotion failure left blue", before 3 change and before 2 change, the left symbol and middle as usual. The blue symbol chance eye is displayed by the symbol, and before one change, it is promoted from the blue symbol chance eye so that it becomes "4 ↓ 5" ⇒ "4 (4) 5" ⇒ "4 ↓ 5" ⇒ "445". It looks as if it is done, but it is not actually promoted and the blue pattern chance eye is displayed.

Further, in the promotion failure pattern, it is preferable to configure the pattern so that the symbol is stopped at a symbol close to the blue symbol so as not to be mistaken for promotion to the green symbol. For example, "445" (left blue symbol chance eye) ⇒ (next change) "4 ↓ 5" ⇒ "435". At this time, as a player, will the blue symbol chance be continued at "445", or will it be promoted to the green symbol chance at "455", or will the chance be over? I am paying attention to which one it will be. The decorative design is scrolling at a low speed, and when "4" passes (does not stop), it is highly expected that the next "5" will stop (promote), but here "5" If it also passes, the player will be very discouraged. Therefore, if the chance eye does not continue, the symbol displayed in front of the symbol with the lower expectation of the chance eye (here, the blue symbol "4") (here, "3") is stopped. It is preferable to configure the player so as not to have unnecessary expectations, and to expect whether the player is the same as the previous one or is promoted only when the chances are continued or promoted.

In addition, the pattern that the display of the chance eye is started and the display of the chance eye ends in the middle (before the hold that won the chance eye execution possibility lottery starts to change) and the display of the chance eye ends once. A pattern to be revived may be provided.

(Pattern in which the display of chance eyes ends in the middle)
For example, as a chance eye scenario pattern that can be determined when a new game ball enters the fourth hold, a pattern of "3 before change: left blue → 2 before change: left blue → 1 before change: none". May be provided.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 95, stop at "861" ⇒ 3 before change: stop at "667" (blue symbol chance) ⇒ 2 before change: stop at "667" (blue symbol chance) ⇒ Before 1 change: "6 ↓ 7 → 6 (6) 7 (blue symbol chance eyes stop in the middle symbol" 6 ") → 6 ↓ 7 → 617" (no chance eyes). It should be noted that this pattern is likely to be selected when the expectation of a big hit is low.

In addition, if there is no chance eye before one change, by configuring so that the blue symbol is selected for the left symbol or the right symbol, it becomes possible to incite whether or not the blue symbol chance eye will continue. ..

(Pattern that the display of the first chance ends and revives)
For example, as a chance eye scenario pattern that can be determined when a new game ball enters the fourth hold, a pattern of "3 before change: left blue → 2 before change: none → 1 before change: left blue". May be provided.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 96, "861" ⇒ 3 before change: "667" (blue symbol chance eye) ⇒ 2 before change: none ⇒ 1 before change: "667" (blue symbol chance eye) Become. Since this pattern is finally a blue pattern chance, it is easy to be selected when the big hit expectation is low.

(Display of the second decorative pattern at the chance eye display timing)
When the first decorative symbol (main decorative symbol) is fixedly stopped at the chance, the second decorative symbol (sub-decorative symbol) is also fixedly stopped at the chance. In addition, since the second decorative symbol continues to be scrolled during the fluctuation, the chance eye is once displayed in the first decorative symbol by executing a pattern such as "promotion left green" (in this case, "left blue" is displayed. Even in the case of (displaying), the second decorative symbol does not display the chance eye to be once displayed as the first decorative symbol.

(Sound effect corresponding to the stop display of the chance eye)
When the chance eye is stopped and displayed as the first decorative symbol, a special stop sound may be output to indicate that it is the chance eye. In addition, the blue symbol chance eye, the green symbol chance eye, and the red symbol chance eye may have different special stop sounds, and the blue symbol chance eye and the green symbol chance eye, which have relatively low expectations, are set to the same special stop sound. A different special stop sound may be used for the red pattern chance eye, which has a relatively high expectation.

<Prohibition processing>
(When shortening fluctuation is lost)
If a new hold occurs after the trigger hold after the chance eye effect as the look-ahead effect is started, the change display from 3 before to 1 change before the change for the trigger hold is shortened and lost. (Variation mode a1, 3 seconds) In this case, promotion green (promotion left green, promotion right green), promotion red (promotion left red, promotion) cannot be secured because the promotion time cannot be secured. Right red) is configured not to run.

For example, if ID 5 is selected in hold 4, promotion left green will be executed before 2 changes. However, when the shortened fluctuation loss (variation mode a1, 3 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation before the two fluctuations, there is no time to display the blue symbol chance eye once and then promote it to the green symbol chance eye. , It is configured to change to a pattern that displays left green (stops the green symbol on the left symbol and the middle symbol) from the beginning instead of promoting it at the start of fluctuation.

(Chance eyes and timer production)
FIG. 97 is an example of changing the configuration diagram of the look-ahead lottery table of FIG. 70.

In this figure, "timer effect" is provided as a type of look-ahead effect, and once displayed, the timer effect is displayed in the fluctuation of the hold (pre-reading trigger hold) in which the execution of the timer effect is decided in the look-ahead lottery table. Continues to be displayed until is finished. For example, when the execution of the timer effect is determined in the hold 4, the character "waiting for timer" is displayed from the start of the next change, and the character "waiting for timer" is displayed at a predetermined timing in the change of the look-ahead trigger hold. The display changes to, for example, "60:00" (60 seconds), the countdown starts from "60:00", and when "00:00" is reached, the timer effect display is erased and the timer effect ends.

Like this timer effect, there is a look-ahead effect that continues to be displayed until the fluctuation of the look-ahead trigger hold, and the above-mentioned "pattern in which the display of the chance eye ends in the middle" and the timer effect are executed. In the case of compounding, there is a concern that the player's interest in the timer effect will be significantly reduced due to the pattern in which the display of the chance eye ends in the middle of the chance eye.

Therefore, in the pre-reading effect execution enable / non-execution lottery in the pre-reading lottery table, a "no chance eye gap" is provided in which the pattern in which the display of the chance eye ends is not executed in the middle. It can be configured so that the pattern that ends the display of the chance eye is not executed.

In addition, when "no chance eye ghost" is not provided, the chance eye scenario determination table may be changed depending on whether or not the timer effect is won. Specifically, if the timer effect is won, the chance eye scenario determination table that does not have a pattern that the display of the chance eye ends in the middle is used, but if the timer effect is not won, the chance eye scenario determination table is used. Use the chance eye scenario determination table having a pattern in which the display of the chance eye ends at.

(Stage level up and chance eyes)
In the stage level up in the look-ahead effect, as described above, a special symbol may be used as the decorative symbol. However, since the decorative design is used even at the chance, the look-ahead lottery table may be configured so that both cannot be executed at the same time.

It is also possible to set up a chance eye scenario determination table so that a special symbol that triggers the stage level up can be displayed at the chance eye.

For example, at the time of hold 4 in FIG. 93, a pattern of "3 before change: left blue → 2 before change: left green → 1 before change: promotion special symbol" is provided, and before 1 change, a red symbol is set from the green symbol chance. It can be configured to display a special symbol by pretending to be promoted to the chance.

In addition, in the fluctuation where it is decided to execute the "promotion special symbol", when the shortened fluctuation loss (variation time 3 seconds in this example) is selected as the fluctuation pattern, an effect pretending to be promoted is executed. It can be configured so that the special symbol can be displayed by changing to a pattern that stops and displays the special symbol without any problem.

<Example of changing chances>
(Valid line)
This gaming machine has been described as a one-line machine having one effective line, but in the case of a five-line machine having five effective lines, the same symbol may be displayed on the liquid crystal display screen in a misaligned manner. As a chance in this case, it is possible to configure the jackpot expectation to be different depending on the shape of the display of the same symbol.

Specifically, it is a chance eye as shown in FIGS. 98 (A) to 98 (D), and the jackpot expectation is configured so that D = C <B <A. Here, when the symbols that make up the chance eye are displayed in the middle, the jackpot expectation of trigger hold is the highest, and when two symbols are lined up, it is the second highest, and the three symbols are disjointed. The case is the lowest. Even in such a configuration, the promotion effect can be executed before the symbol row in the middle row, which is the final stop symbol row, is stopped. For example, by scrolling one or two symbols in the middle row to the left from the situation where the stop display is likely to occur in the mode shown in FIG. 98 (C) or the temporarily stopped state, the display mode has a higher degree of expectation ( A) or (B) may be used, or the mode of FIG. 98 (B) may be changed to the mode of (A) by returning one symbol in the middle row to the right. ..

It should be noted that the configuration described in the one-line machine of this gaming machine may be applied as a chance eye when two symbols are arranged side by side.

Further, as the chance eye, the display mode in the main stop of the decorative symbol which is stopped and displayed together with the stop display of the special symbol may be treated as the chance eye, and the decoration may be performed a plurality of times during one variable display of the special symbol. The temporary stop display mode at the timing of the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol at the time of executing the re-variation effect of displaying the variation of the symbol may be treated as an opportunity eye.

<<< Specification change example >>>
In the present embodiment, it has been described as a so-called ST machine (probability variation number cut) in which the probability variation ends at 10,000 times, but it can also be applied to a gaming machine in which the probability variation continues until the "next big hit".

M Main control board A 1st main game-related electrical member, A10, A10-2 1st main game start port A11s, A11s-2 1st main game start port entry ball detection device A20 1st main game symbol display device A21g 1st Main game symbol display unit, A21h 1st main game symbol hold display unit B 2nd main game-related electrical member, B10 2nd main game start port B11s 2nd main game start port entry ball detection device B20 2nd main game symbol display device , B21g 2nd main game symbol display unit B21h 2nd main game symbol hold display unit C 1st and 2nd main game shared electrical components, C10 1st big prize opening C11s 1st big winning opening winning detection device, C11d 1st Large prize opening electric accessory C20 2nd large winning opening, C21s 2nd large winning opening winning detection device C21d 2nd large winning opening electric accessory FS distribution device, FB distribution member HD-1 1st non-electric accessory, HD-2 2nd non-electric accessory E10 auxiliary game electric accessory, E10s auxiliary game electric accessory entry detection device N1 1st open entry port, N1 2nd open entry opening H auxiliary game-related electrical member, H10 auxiliary Game start port H11s Auxiliary game start port entry ball detection device, H20 Auxiliary game symbol display device H21g Auxiliary game symbol display unit, H21h Auxiliary game symbol hold display unit S Sub control board, SM effect display control means (sub-main control board)
SS effect display means (sub-sub control unit)
SG effect display device, SG10 display area SG11 decorative symbol display area, SG12 1st hold display unit SG13 2nd hold display unit SG14 The fluctuation suggestion display unit SB sub input button, SBs sub input button input detection device SB-2 cross key KH Prize ball payout control board, KE prize ball payout device

Claims (1)

A starting port where a game ball can enter, and
An identification information display unit that can display identification information,
The main game department that controls the progress of the game,
A staging display unit that can display staging, and a staging display unit
It is equipped with a sub-game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game club
Random number acquisition means to acquire random numbers based on the entry into the starting port,
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, a random number temporary storage means that temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied, and a random number temporary storage means.
When the pass / fail judgment permission condition for a certain hold is satisfied, the pass / fail judgment is executed based on the random number related to the hold, and the stop display mode of the identification information and the variable display mode of the identification information are determined based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. Means for determining game content and
An identification information display control means that controls the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit according to the determination by the game content determination means.
A special game control means capable of executing a special game that is advantageous for the player after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the random number is a win and the identification information is stopped and displayed.
It is equipped with a game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying the effect executed on the sub-game department side to the sub-game department side.
The sub-game club
A game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means, the effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit, and the effect display content control means.
It is provided with a staging symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the staging symbol to be displayed on the staging display unit after the staging symbol is variablely displayed on the staging display unit.
When there is one or more pre-digestion holds that satisfy a certain hold and the variable display start condition of the identification information prior to the certain hold, the variable display start condition of the identification information related to the pre-digestion hold During the variable display of the identification information when the above is satisfied, it is possible to execute a plurality of look-ahead effects foretelling the expected degree of execution of the future special game due to the certain hold.
As a plurality of look-ahead effects, there are a first look-ahead effect that can be displayed for each change in the identification information related to the pre-digestion hold, and an effect using a specific image different from the effect symbol. The second look-ahead effect, which can be continuously displayed until the change of the identification information related to the certain hold when displayed in the change of the identification information related to the pre-digestion hold, and the effect using the effect symbol, are for the effect. By displaying a special symbol as a symbol, it has a third look-ahead effect that can change the effect display content controlled by the effect display content control means to an effect display content different from that before the special symbol is displayed.
When it is decided to execute both the first look-ahead effect and the second look-ahead effect, the first look-ahead effect can be executed for each change of the identification information regarding the identification information regarding the look-ahead hold.
While the second look-ahead effect and the third look-ahead effect can be executed at the same time, the first look-ahead effect and the third look-ahead effect are not executed at the same time.
The staging symbols are divided into a plurality of systems, and one system is configured to include one or more staging symbols.
When the final display mode of the staging symbol is displayed, the final display mode of the staging symbol is displayed in each of the plurality of staging symbol rows, so that the final staging symbol composed of the plurality of staging symbols is displayed. It is configured to display a combination of display modes.
When the first look-ahead effect is executed, at least one final display mode of the effect symbol among the final display modes of the effect symbols displayed in each of the plurality of effect symbol rows is the other effect symbol. It is configured so that the design is different from the final display mode of.
A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that when a stop display of an effect symbol related to the first look-ahead effect is performed, an effect effect according to the type of the effect symbol related to the first look-ahead effect is executed.

Images